JP2019017701A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine which performs a lottery as a prescribed condition is satisfied and imparts a prescribed profit to a player in accordance with a result of the lottery includes: performance control means controlling prescribed performance related to a result of the lottery; and sound output means outputting prescribed sound. The performance control means is provided with: volume setting means setting performance sound volume outputted in the progress process of performance by a player's operation; separate setting means which sets specific sound related information (including high pitched sound cut) separate from performance sound volume by a player operation separate from setting operation related to the performance sound volume; and notification sound setting means which sets notification sound corresponding to abnormality on the basis that the abnormality related to the game machine is detected. When specific abnormality of abnormality for which notification sound is to be outputted is detected, notification sound can be outputted without reflecting setting about the specific sound related information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 116

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed based on a winning at the start opening, and after the symbols displayed on the display device are variably displayed, the symbols are stopped according to the lottery result. There is a gaming machine that generates a gaming state. In addition, the game effect is executed in association with the variable display of the symbol, and a predetermined display is performed on the display device or a predetermined effect sound is output from the speaker, thereby increasing the expectation of the big hit gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, many gaming machines capable of adjusting the effect sound related to the symbol variation display have been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-099794 A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, although it is possible to achieve a game effect at a player's favorite volume by adjusting the volume level, it is possible to realize a game effect effect mode according to the player's preference. It was difficult, and there was a possibility that it would lead to a decrease in the amusement interest.

  Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.
In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine that performs a lottery by establishment of a predetermined condition and grants a predetermined profit to a player according to a result of the lottery,
Production control means for controlling a predetermined production related to the result of the lottery,
Sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,
The production control means includes
Volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output in the progression process of the effect by player operation;
Another setting means for setting specific sound related information different from the volume of the effect sound by a player operation different from the setting operation related to the volume of the effect sound;
Based on detection of an abnormality relating to the gaming machine, notification sound setting means for setting a notification sound corresponding to the abnormality;
With
When a specific abnormality is detected among the abnormalities to output the notification sound, the notification sound can be output without reflecting the setting for the specific sound related information.

  In the above configuration, the volume of the effect sound is set by the player operation different from the setting operation related to the volume of the effect sound, and the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output in the progression process of the effect by the player operation. And another setting means for setting another specific sound-related information, and the setting of the volume of the effect sound is reflected during the output of the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality based on the detection of the abnormality related to the gaming machine Although it does not, it will reflect the setting of specific sound related information, so specific sound related information different from the volume of the production sound can also be set according to the player's preference, only to suppress the decline of the game entertainment In addition, when a specific abnormality occurs, the setting of the specific sound related information is not reflected so that the occurrence of the abnormality can be reliably detected (see, for example, the descriptions in paragraphs 1282 to 1317).

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which made the center role etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a front view of the game board of the state which made the center role etc. transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a game area in which a game ball circulates by cutting a front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and an obstacle nail. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the right game ball in a table | surface unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which distribute | circulates the 1st guide path in a guide passage group, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which distribute | circulates the 2nd guide path in a guide passage group. is there. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball received in the prize winning opening, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part of the 3rd sorting apparatus in (a) from a plane, (c) These are explanatory drawings which show the site | part of the 2nd distribution apparatus in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of operation | movement of the prize winning opening according to the kind of "small hit", a 1st distribution apparatus, and a 2nd distribution apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in an attacker unit, and is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of the guide channel group different from FIG. (E) And (f) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of a further different guide channel group. (A) is a front view of the out sphere detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out sphere detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out sphere detection unit, and (d) is a back view. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as viewed from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit and the right front lower position. It is a figure and (g) is the perspective view which looked at the out ball detection unit from the lower right back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the out-ball detection unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the out-sphere detection unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a game panel and an out ball | bowl detection unit, (b) is a perspective view which shows the state which made the out ball | bowl detection unit contact | abut on a game panel. It is the expanded sectional view seen from the right side by assembling to the game board, cutting up and down at the center of the out port right sensor. It is a perspective view which shows the vicinity of an out mouth from the front in the state assembled to the game board. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the light-guide plate production unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the light-guide plate production unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light-guide plate and the pattern board | substrate in a light-guide plate effect unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which light-emitted the 1st pattern of the light-guide plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which light-emitted the 2nd pattern of the light-guide plate. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which made the 2nd pattern light-emit on the light guide plate of the light guide plate production | presentation unit of a back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 137 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. 137. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 140. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 141. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electrically-powered object control processing which are performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit | judging determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the type of the big hit, and (C) is a big hit symbol determination table. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the type. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hits control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hits start process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hitting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is an example of an aspect of error notification. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band. It is a table which shows the winning probability etc. according to the setting value of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing shown about the procedure which changes a setting value. It is a fluctuation pattern table used for determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a right detection sensor is provided in a 1st guide path. It is an example of a specific effect at the time of execution of the warning effect using the right detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a detection sensor is provided in a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is a specific production example when executing a warning production using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a 2nd out port is provided in the entrance vicinity of a 1st guide path and a 2nd guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a 2nd out port is provided in the exit vicinity of the inside of a 1st guide path. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation when abnormality arises. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of the calculation when abnormality arises. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment in which a 2nd out port and a 3rd out port are provided separately from an out port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of a calculation in case the 2nd out port and the 3rd out port are provided separately from the out port. It is the light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color pattern of the light-guide plate was set. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a some decoration body is provided around the display area of an effect display apparatus. It is a concrete example of a production | presentation with the light-guide plate and the some decoration body at the time of execution of light emission production | presentation. It is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. It is the specific example of an effect in a light guide plate and an effect display device at the time of execution of imitation effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 Control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. As described above, the player can enjoy the operation of driving the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back effect. The player can be entertained by performing a light emission effect by the unit 3200 or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front after disassembly. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 136) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b, and inclined portions 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the leading end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed in which the illegal string is manipulated to allow the illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port, etc. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part of the game, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full sphere receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and communicates with a full tank guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 is provided. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through-sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorated board 278, the dish lower left decorated board 283, and the dish lower right decorated board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are partly projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In addition, a step with the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 being higher can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a. Accordingly, the player can hook his / her finger using the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Can be used as a finger hook when operating the production operation unit 301 described later. Moreover, the game balls B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward due to the steps between the upper left bulging portion 252a and the upper right flaring portion 252a.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. It is possible to participate not only in the game ball driving operation for the player but also in the effect during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. And a dish central lower decorative board 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the output direction is directed upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled in the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and is shown as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove 530 a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing flail 111 meanders in a plan view, and an illegal tool is seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front side to the right side from the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-movable movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570 A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed by voice (for example, “please pull out the ball!”) And the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front top with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose plan view extends in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view, and the front wall and the rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature at the downstream side than at the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical spot can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game by the interruption of the game can be enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of this can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from the lower side to the rear side from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically, from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower in front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end thereof is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end that is inclined so that the circulation direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearwardly can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can be grasped at the tip of the electric wiring by opening the grip portion by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lower as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The left step 501n and the right step 501o are inclined such that the rear right corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball grind) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the direction of the pressure applied to the game ball B can be prevented, so that the game balls B can be prevented from being pressed against each other, and the game ball B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to the inclination thereof, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4 to cause a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which the center role etc. is made opaque in the pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the gaming board as viewed from the rear. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the center role etc. is made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 116 is a front view of the game board showing a game area in which game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and the obstacle nail.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a normal winning for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B are provided. A mouth 2003, a second start opening 2004, a big prize opening 2005, and a prize winning prize 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B includes a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, a bonus winning port 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, in order to be accepted, a game for performing a driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a is performed.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 116 and the like) that abut on the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 136 and the like) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. And further.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 is composed of a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2513. , First V winning mouth sensor 2514, first lose mouth sensor 2515, second V winning mouth sensor 3003, third lose mouth sensor 3004, out mouth left sensor 3032, out mouth right sensor 3033, start mouth solenoid 2412, attacker This relay is used to relay the connection with the solenoid 2414, the prize winning solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution drive motor 2555, and the like.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (three here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are game regions. A first start opening 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and a normal winning opening 2003 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a. And the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port that allow the game ball B to be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2003. The big winning opening 2005 and the first start opening 2002 or the second start enabling the reception of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by the reception of the game ball B to 2004 Mouth 2 In response to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to 04, it is accepted in the accessory prize winning port 2006 and the feature prize winning port 2006 that can accept the game ball B. A first V winning port 2007 and a second V winning port 2008 to which an opportunity for acceptance is given to the game ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a. I have.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit attached on the left side of the side unit 2200 slightly on the front side. 2300 and an attacker having a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, which are attached to the right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. Above the unit 2400, the start port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, in the game area 5a, substantially in the front view And the upper attached to and character object winning opening to close 2006 includes a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 frame-shaped center won game 2500 has the.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning port 2003, a second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the second starting port 2004, And a big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005. The center prize 2500 includes a prize winning hole sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006, and a first V prize opening that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. A sensor 2514 and a first lose mouth sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the first lose mouth 2535 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first unit provided in the start port unit 2100. A first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in one start port 2002, and a second V prize port sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 of the center accessory 2500. And a third losing port sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received in the third losing port 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 136).

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a and enters the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the bonus winning opening 2006. Out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting unaccepted game ball B (game ball B for which no privilege is given), light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of back box 3010, and light guide plate effect unit 3100 , And a rear effect unit 3200 attached in the back box 3010.

  The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 includes a first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a second V of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500. The back lower ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the received game ball B and discharges it to the winning hole 2008 and the third lost hole 2556, the first lost hole 2535 in the center accessory 2500, and the first V winning hole 2007. A back right ball discharge unit 3130 that receives the game ball B received by the player and discharges it downward, a magnetic sensor (not shown) that detects magnetism acting illegally on the warp inlet 2501 in the center accessory 2500, Is equipped.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117B is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008 and an out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1103 of the game panel 1100, and penetrates the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end openings of the normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. Yes.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparently so that the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The gaming panel 1100 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 116 and the like).

  The game panel 1100 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The gaming panel 1100 is the lowest position in the gaming area 5a, and an out recess 1101 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1102 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the game panel 1100 includes a notch 1103 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1103 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch penetrate through the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward. Although not shown in detail, a decorative sheet with a pattern and decoration in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000, and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. B can be received, and can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 136) that controls game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor. 2513, first V winning mouth sensor 2514, first lose mouth sensor 2515, second V winning mouth sensor 3003, third lost mouth sensor 3004, out mouth left sensor 3032, out mouth right sensor 3033, start mouth solenoid 2412, attacker A solenoid 2414, an accessory prize winning solenoid 2512, a first distribution solenoid 2532, a second distribution solenoid 2545, a third distribution drive motor 2555, a magnetic sensor 2010, and the like are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status and a normal lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. A normal symbol display composed of two LEDs, and a normal hold indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the reception of the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 has a round consisting of five LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 136) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting leftward from the left side surface and one right fixed piece 1602 projecting rightward from the right side surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. At this point, it is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it upward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the right game ball in the front unit. FIG. 120A is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls flowing through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and FIG. 120B is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. FIG. FIG. 121 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game balls received in the winning prize winning opening, and FIG. 121 (b) is an explanatory view showing the portion of the third sorting apparatus in FIG. c) It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part of the 2nd distribution apparatus in (a).

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing operation timings of the prize winning opening, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of “small hit”. FIG. 123 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 123 (a). The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. Yes.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and a plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a first start port 2002 that is attached at a different position in the game area 5a and that is always open so that the game ball B can be received. The normal start port 2003, the second start port 2004 that allows the game ball B to be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball B is received in the normal win port 2003, and the first start port 2002. Alternatively, a first prize opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B at the second start slot 2004, and the first start slot The prize winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B at 002 or the second start opening 2004, The first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 are provided to the game ball B received in the winning port 2006.

  A plurality (three here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a and on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The normal winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a slightly lower height than the first starting opening 2002 between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002. The prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003. The second V prize winning port 2008 is arranged right above the first starting port 2002 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning ports 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 which is attached to the left side of the side unit 2200 slightly on the front side. An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the start opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005. Above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in front view in the game area 5a. And character object winning hole 2006 attached to Ri, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 has a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, the.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  When the start port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Located directly under the center of Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503, it is received at the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The start opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the back bottom ball of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3120.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two right general winning ports 2001 are opened upward, and the left general winning port 2001 is opened upward.

  In the state in which the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general winning ports 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to be lowered to the right.

  In the state where the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 (see FIG. 119, etc.).

  The attacker unit 2400 is formed in a triangular shape whose outer shape in front view increases from the lower side toward the right. In the attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward in the upper right corner. The second starting port 2004 is provided at the lower left, spaced apart from the normal winning port 2003 by a distance larger than one game ball B, and is always open forward. The grand prize winning port 2005 is provided near the lower left lower end of the second starting port 2004, and can be opened to be opened forward.

  The attacker unit 2400 has an ordinary winning opening 2003 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. Also, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball, and the winning prize opening 2005 is about 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is open at.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning port 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 and a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism are provided (see FIG. 136 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second start opening 2004, and a normal lottery in which the second start opening door 2411 is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the result, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are connected to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by acceptance.

  As shown in FIGS. 119, 120, and 123, the attacker unit 2400 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 and above the second starting opening 2004, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left. The second start-up upper guide shelf 2421, the second start-up left standing wall portion 2422 provided on the left side of the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421 and extending vertically, and the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421 A second starting port right upright wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, and provided below the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 to the right of the grand prize winning port 2005, A large winning opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to become lower toward the left.

  The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 is located at the center between the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 in the left-right direction from the right side of the second starting port 2004 to the left end of the second starting port 2004. It extends to the left to the vicinity. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 prevents the game ball B from being received into the second starting port 2004 from above.

  The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 is provided from the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to the left with an interval through which one game ball B can pass. The second starting port left standing wall 2422 extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting port 2004. ing. The upper end of the second starting port left standing wall 2422 is bent to the right.

  The second starting port right standing wall 2423 extends vertically from the right end of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to the same height as the lower end of the second starting port 2004. The second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the game ball B from being received from the right side into the second starting port 2004.

  The big winning opening guide shelf 2424 is slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting port 2004, and is located on the left side of the left end of the second starting port 2004. From the lower end of the second starting port 2004, one game ball B is provided. At a height lower by a minute, the left-right direction extends to the left and right so that the left end side is lower than the second start-port left standing wall portion 2422 and to the same position as the right end of the big winning opening 2005. As shown in the drawing, the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that the right end side rises upward, and the inclination angle becomes tighter toward the right.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 is opened toward the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the attacker that guides the game ball B to a position below the large winning opening 2005 below the large winning opening guide shelf 2424. A right passage 2430 is provided.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is formed between the first opening 2431 that is long and vertically open above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 that opens toward the upper left, a third opening 2433 that opens upward on the lower side of the second starting port 2004, and a large portion below the big prize opening guide shelf 2424. A fourth opening 2434 that is open to the left and vertically long on the right side of the winning opening 2005, and a discharge opening that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens toward the left. 2435. The attacker right passage 2430 is configured such that the game ball B can enter the inside from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and the discharge port 2435. It is possible to release the game ball B only from the outside.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in a multi-step shape with the left side lowered. More specifically, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from a portion above the normal winning port 2003 on the right side of the normal winning port 2003, and to the left at a portion lower than the normal winning port 2003. It bends and wraps around to the lower side of the normal winning opening 2003, and below the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 is bent downward as a part of the left wall, and then the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 is formed. It is bent to the left again at the lower height part and bent downward from the center of the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 to the lower side of the right part to extend to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

  In the attacker right passage 2430, a plurality of protrusions 2436 projecting into the passage and extending left and right are provided on the inner walls on the front side and the rear side of the portion extending vertically. The plurality of protrusions 2436 are provided so that the heights are staggered between the front side and the rear side. The plurality of protrusions 2436 can be guided downward in a zigzag shape while the increase in the downward speed of the game ball B is suppressed when the game ball B abuts.

  The attacker right passage 2430 is to the right of the prize winning opening 2005, and has a plurality of protrusions 2436 provided in a portion that is vertically long and has a fourth opening 2434 open. And a protrusion 2437 protruding into the passage (see FIG. 123 and the like). The presence of the protrusion 2437 can prevent the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 from being released from the fourth opening 2434 to the outside (left side) and can pass through the fourth opening 2434. Thus, the game ball B can be entered into the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without being accepted into the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005.

  In addition, the attacker right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 that is long open up and down at a portion passing to the right of the big prize opening 2005, so that the game ball released to the left from the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 A game ball B, which is in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the winning prize opening 2005 and flows to the right of the winning prize opening 2005 above the winning prize opening 2005, It can be received by the opening 2434 and can enter the attacker right passage 2430. Then, as described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released to the outside only through the discharge port portion 2435 at the lower end, and thus is guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the big winning port 2005. The game ball B does not bounce back to the big prize opening 2005 side due to the presence of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Therefore, when the game ball B released from the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right from the big prize opening 2005 by the obstacle nail when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, No entry will be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005. For this reason, even if a path for the game ball B (here, the attacker right path 2430) is provided adjacent to the grand prize opening 2005, the wall of the path (fourth opening 2434) is on the side of the big prize opening 2005. It is possible to provide a passage for the game ball B adjacent to the big prize opening 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of the game ball B to the big prize opening 2005 without being bounced back to the big prize opening 2005. The pachinko machine 1 having a passage that has not been seen with conventional pachinko machines can be obtained.

  The second start port door 2411 is a plate-like shape extending from the lower side of the second start port 2004 to the vicinity of the second start port left standing wall portion 2422 and is moved forward and backward by the start port solenoid 2412. The second start port door 2411 is inclined so as to be lowered from the left end side toward the second start port 2004 on the right side, and is inclined so as to be lowered rearward at a portion of the second start port 2004. doing. The second start port door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall 2422 falls on the big winning port guide shelf 2424 without contacting the second start port door 2411. Therefore, the second start port 2004 is not entered (accepted).

  On the other hand, in the normal hit state (open state), the second start port 2411 is moving forward, so that the game ball B that has entered between the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall portion 2422 is obtained. However, it comes into contact with the second starting port door 2411, is guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411, and enters (accepts) the second starting port 2004. As described above, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed by the advancement and retreat of the second start port door 2411. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (when energizing). Let

  The grand prize winning door 2413 has a rectangular shape that is long on the left and right sides, and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction with the long side on one side as an axis. The big prize opening door 2413 can close the big prize opening 2005 opened forward by making the short side upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, and the other long side is forward. By turning so as to move, the special winning opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be received. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is discharged on the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 by the special winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the normal winning opening 2003 is below the two outlets of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 described later, and the stage of the center accessory 2500 The second starting port 2004 is positioned at a height between the lower left of the normal winning port 2003 and the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the large winning port 2005. Is positioned below the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. In addition, in a state where the game panel 1100 is attached, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in portions above the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004 (second starting port upper guide shelf 2421), and the big winning port 2005. It is installed.

[5-8e. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 in the gaming area 5a and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has its entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame. It has become.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which a game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be discharged to the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2502 that is open in the inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction (FIG. 116, etc.). See).

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. In the state, it is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides. In the stage 2503, a portion (central discharge portion 2503a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side discharge portion 2503b) on both the left and right sides are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and the game ball | bowl B can be discharge | released into the game area | region 5a from those parts.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (central discharge portion 2503 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 forms a part of the upper outer peripheral surface, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the right from a position on the left side than the center in the left-right direction. , And a guide passage group 2520 including two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. The upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 forms an upstream space portion 2505 having a predetermined width through which the game ball B can circulate with the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000 in a state assembled to the game board 5. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B to the upper side of the attacker unit 2400.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one passage of the guide passage group 2520, and the first special lot drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is selected. According to the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the prize winning hole 2006 that allows the game ball B to be received, and the gaming ball B received in the prize winning prize slot 2006 are transferred to either the V winning side or the lose side. The first distribution device 2530 to be divided and the second distribution to distribute the game balls B distributed to the V winning side by the first distributing device 2530 to either the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port side A device 2540 and a third distribution device 2550 that distributes the game balls B distributed to the second V prize opening side by the second distribution device 2540 to either the second V prize opening 2008 or the lose side. ing.

  In addition, the center prize 2500 accepts the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 by using the prize winning opening door 2511 that can open and close the prize winning opening 2006. A prize winning port solenoid 2512 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by the game, and a prize winning port sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006; The first lose hole sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B received in the first lose hole 2535 and the game ball B that is distributed by the second distribution device 2540 and received in the first V winning opening 2007 is detected. And a first V prize opening sensor 2514.

  As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the upper entrance is provided in the part of the stop portion 1006. The upper entrance is composed of a second guide passage 2522 provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Each of the guide passage group 2520 (the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game ball B flowing through the inside can be viewed from the front.

  The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically and short downward from the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 and then bends to the right at a right angle. When the first guide passage 2521 hits the right rail 1005, the first guide passage 2521 bends downward to the right rail 1005. Along the lower side of the gaming area 5a, bent to the left at a height of about 3/4, and extended to the left so as to be lowered at a gentle angle, the game is more enterable than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. The ball B is bent downward at a position on the left side and extended to the height of the center of the game area 5a, then bent to the right and extended to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bent downward and the exit is downward. It is formed in an open shape. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The prize winning port 2006 is provided in a portion extending leftward in the first guide passage 2521, extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opens upward. ing. The prize winning opening door 2511 extends in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. The prize winning opening 2006 opens upward by moving forward and backward. Can be opened and closed. The prize winning opening door 2511 can close the prize winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and the portion extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521 in the state where the prize winning prize opening 2006 is closed. Can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

  The prize winning opening door 2511 is retracted by driving of the prize winning opening solenoid 2512 to open the prize winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 is returned to the prize winning opening 2006. Can be accepted. The prize winning opening door 2511 closes the prize winning prize opening 2006 when the bonus winning prize solenoid 2512 is OFF (when the power is off), and plays a role when the bonus winning prize solenoid 2512 is ON (when the current is energized). The prize winning opening 2006 is opened.

  The second guide passage 2522 has an inlet opening upward at a position spaced leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 on the right end side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the upper end entrance, and the first guide passage 2521 is bent backward at a position lower than the height of the first bent portion to the right. A portion extending downward on the left side of the accessory winning prize opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 in a state bent downward on the rear side of the front surface of the panel 1100 and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction; It extends downward so that the left and right directions substantially coincide with each other, bends to the right in the form of a crank at the central height of the game area 5a, then bends downward, and the lower right of the first guide passage 2521 The first guide passage 2521 extends to the lower right in the first guide passage 2521 in a state where the first guide passage 2521 and the front-rear direction are flush with each other after being bent forward at a portion lower than the portion extending toward the front. Along the underside of the part Bent rightward in the building so, then bent downwards so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is formed in a shape of the outlet is open downward.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are overlapped from the front by being arranged in the front-rear direction at portions extending vertically on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. Part 2520a. In this heavy viewing portion 2520a, both the game ball B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 can be seen well from the front, It is difficult for the player to determine which passage the game ball B that circulates in the heavy viewing portion 2520a circulates.

  In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the overlap portion 2520a, and below the overlap portion 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees in the direction opposite to the upper side around the vertical axis. The respective outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are opened downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b at intervals in the distribution direction of the game ball B, and the distribution speed of the game ball B abuts on the protrusion 2520b. Can be suppressed (see FIG. 111).

  The first distribution device 2530 is provided at a height between the prize winning opening 2006 and a portion extending to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521 (game) It is provided behind the front surface of the panel 1100.

  The first sorting device 2530 has a housing portion 2531a capable of housing only one game ball B on its outer peripheral surface, and a sorting rotator 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a sorting rotator 2531. A first sorting solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 136 and the like) for rotating the sorting rotator 2531 between a state in which the housing portion 2531a of the container is facing rightward and a state of facing upward. A cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 covering the outer periphery of the minute rotating body 2531 and the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 pass through the upper portion of the distributing rotating body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533. A first distribution guiding path 2534 for guiding to the upper outer peripheral surface of the minute rotating body 2531 and a rear opening at the lower part of the first distributing guiding path 2534 are provided in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distributing rotating body 2531. Games not contained The first loser opening 2535 into which B enters and the ball ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 circulates and passes through the right side portion of the allocating rotator 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533 to the right. And a first Atari passage 2536 extending to the front.

  The sorting rotator 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose outer peripheral surface is narrowed backward. The first end passage 2536 has a right end side bent rearward and then bent downward to communicate with the second sorting device 2540 side.

  In the first sorting device 2530, in a state where the first sorting solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 faces rightward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the prize winning prize opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534 and comes into contact with the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotator 2531, the outer periphery of the distribution rotator 2531 Since the surface is formed in a truncated cone shape constricted rearward, the game ball is guided rearward due to the inclination of the outer peripheral surface and enters the first loser opening 2535.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the first sorting solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the sorting rotator 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the housing portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 121 (a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 passes through the first sorting guide path 2534, only one is stored in the storage portion 2531a. If the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the side of the prize winning port 2006 in a state where the game ball B is stored in the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531, the game ball After B comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a, it enters the rear first lost mouth 2535. The game ball B that has entered the first lose hole 2535 is delivered to the back right sphere discharge unit 3130 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and is provided in the back right sphere discharge unit 3130. After being detected by 2515, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  When the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2531a, the first rotating solenoid 2532 rotates the sorting rotator 2531 in the clockwise direction so that the housing portion 2531a faces rightward. The game ball B housed in 2531a rolls from the housing portion 2531a to the right first athletic passage 2536 side and circulates through the first attitious passage 2536. The game ball B that has circulated through the first Atari passage 2536 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540.

  As described above, in the first distribution device 2530, the game balls B received in the winning prize winning opening 2006 can be distributed to either the second distribution device 2540 side or the first loser opening 2535 side. it can.

  As shown in FIGS. 116 and 119 and the like, the second sorting device 2540 is provided below the first sorting device 2530 and behind the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second distribution device 2540 is provided behind the first distribution guide path 2534 and the first ate passage 2536 of the first distribution device 2530.

  As shown in FIG. 121, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 side circulate. The second distribution guiding path 2541 extending up and down, the first V winning opening 2007 opened on the right side of the lower part of the second distributing guiding path 2541, and the first V winning opening 2007 extending rightward. A first V prize passage 2542 that extends downward and a first V prize opening sensor that is provided in the first V prize passage 2542 and detects the game ball B received in the first V prize opening 2007. 2514.

  Further, the second distribution device 2540 is provided at the lower end of the second distribution guide path 2541 so as to open upward, and above the second loss opening 2543. A sorting door 2544 capable of opening and closing the losing port 2543, a second allocating solenoid 2545 for moving the sorting door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second losing port 2543, and a left extending from the second losing port 2543 And a second loss passage 2546 bent downward later. The distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward, and is inclined so that the right side is lowered.

  In the second sorting device 2540, when the second sorting solenoid 2545 is OFF (not energized), the sorting door 2544 is retracted, and the second loser opening 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, the game ball B enters the second losing port 2543 and passes through the second losing passage 2546. It is sent to the tri-distributor 2550 side.

  On the other hand, in the state where the second sorting solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the sorting door 2544 moves forward above the second losing port 2543, and the second losing port 2543 is closed by the allocating door 2544. The game ball B cannot be received. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544, and It will be guided to the right by the inclination and will enter (accept) the first V prize opening 2007. Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V prize opening 2007 circulates through the first V prize path 2542 and is detected by the first V prize opening sensor 2514, and then the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back right sphere discharge unit 3130.

  When the ball game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 is received in the first V prize opening 2007 and detected by the first V prize opening sensor 2514, the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern. A “big hit game” that opens and closes is executed. The second sorting device 2540 can be viewed from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

  As described above, in the second sorting device 2540, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 is used as the first V winning opening 2007 or the second loser mouth. 2543 (third sorter 2550) can be assigned to either side.

  The third sorting device 2550 is provided above the stage 2503 in the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIGS. The third distribution device 2550 communicates with the lower end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540, and a crank-shaped third distribution guide path 2551 for guiding the game ball B to the left, A third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided in the middle of the three distribution guiding path 2551, and detects the game ball B circulating inside, and is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a croon 2553 to which a game ball B guided by the third distribution guiding path 2551 is supplied in a container shape depressed downward.

  Further, the third sorting device 2550 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the clune in the plan view so as to be rotatable around an axis in the vertical direction, and is provided below the croon 2553 for sorting rotation. A third distribution drive motor 2555 (see FIG. 114) for rotating the blades 2554, a second V winning opening 2008 opened at the front end of the peripheral wall of the croon 2553, and a second V winning opening 2008 on the peripheral wall of the croon 2553 The third lost ball outlet 2556 that is open on both the left and right sides, and the third divided ball discharge passage that separately guides the game balls B received in the second V prize winning port 2008 and the third lost hole 2556, respectively. 2557.

  Further, the third sorting device 2550 is not shown in the figure, but a spur gear-like rotary gear that rotates integrally with the sorting rotary blade 2554 below the croon 2553 and a spur gear-like shape that meshes with the rotary gear. , A flat plate-like detection piece protruding downward from the vicinity of the periphery of the lower surface of the driven gear, and a third distribution rotation detection sensor for detecting the detection piece.

  The third sorting guide path 2551 extends shortly from the lower end of the second loss passage 2546 to the lower side, then bends to the left and extends to the vicinity of the right end of the croon 2553 and then moves downward into the croon 2553. It is bent into a crank shape. The third distribution guiding path 2551 is formed so as to release the game ball B to the right front corner in the croon 2553 in plan view. The third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided at the entrance of the third distribution guide path 2551.

  The croon 2553 is formed in a horizontally long elliptical dish shape having the lowest center. The sorting rotary blade 2554 is provided with a pair of projecting pieces 2554a (see FIG. 108 and the like) projecting at right angles to the rotation axis, and a confetti-like decoration with a plurality of projections projecting from a sphere. Part 2554b. This sort rotating blade 2554 is always rotated in a fixed direction by the third sort drive motor 2555, and the third sort rotation detecting sensor monitors whether the sort rotating blade 2554 is rotating. ing. When the game ball B in the croon 2553 comes into contact with the projecting piece 2554a in a state where the sorting rotary blade 2554 is rotating, the game ball B can be repelled toward the peripheral wall side of the croon 2553. The third loser holes 2556 provided on the left and right sides of the second V winning award port 2008 are respectively formed in the same size as the second V winning award port 2008.

  In the third sorting device 2550, the sorting rotary blade 2554 at the center of the croon 2553 is always rotated by the third sorting drive motor 2555. Then, when the game balls B are distributed to the second loser opening 2543 by the second distribution device 2540, the game balls B are supplied from the second loss passage 2546 to the croon 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551. At this time, the game ball B supplied to the croon 2553 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552. Based on the detection of the game ball B by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game ball B by the croon 2553 is executed.

  When the game ball B supplied from the third distribution guiding path 2551 to the croon 2553 rotates (circulates) in the croon 2553 while narrowing the turning radius, and comes into contact with the projecting piece 2554a of the distribution rotating blade 2554, the croon 2553 It is bounced to the surrounding wall side. When the game ball B is bounced forward by the sorting rotary blade 2554, the game ball B enters (accepts) either the second V winning port 2008 or the two third lose ports 2556. In the third distribution device 2550, the game balls B are distributed to the second V prize opening 2008 with a probability of 1/3.

  The game ball B that has entered the second V winning opening 2008 is delivered to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third allocating ball discharge passage 2557 and discharged from the lower back ball. After being detected by the second V prize opening sensor 3003 provided in the unit 3120, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loser opening 2556 is transferred to the back bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third sorting ball discharge passage 2557, After being detected by a third losing port sensor 3004 provided in the ball discharge unit 3120, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  As described above, in the third distribution device 2550, the game balls B distributed to the second loser port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 are either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loser port 2556. Can be sorted.

[5-8f. Game Ball Flow in the Game Area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 116, FIG. 119 to FIG. In a state assembled to the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion on the left side and a lower portion of the center accessory 2500, and a portion between the attacker unit 2400 and the center accessory 2500. Has been. In addition, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 allows the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 to be placed more than the warp inlet 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so as to mainly enter the right part, and is adjusted so as to enter the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than them.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are distributed through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. The ball B is adjusted so as to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning port 2003, and the left side of the normal winning port 2003 with the same probability, and the second guide passage The game balls B that have circulated through 2522 are adjusted to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven from the left side to the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIG. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2501 of the center object 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than them. You are guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 may be accepted. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the back bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the general prize opening sensor. After being detected by 3001, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly received in the first start port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not received in the general winning award port 2001 are discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left-right direction (first start port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged obliquely along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that the first start opening 2002 is received. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged in an oblique manner. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (received) the warp inlet 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first probability is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release portions 2503b on the left and right sides of the central release portion 2503a, it is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then transferred to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 to be first started. After being detected by the mouth sensor 3002, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given. The game ball B that has been released from the stage 2503 and has not been received in the first start port 2002 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  Note that the game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is not likely to be received in the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and in rare cases, the opened large winning opening 2005. May be accepted.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is compared with the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first start port 2002 is set higher.

  On the other hand, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven with the strength that the game ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2505) of the center accessory 2500, The game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). Then, the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 120 (a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning port door 2511 that closes the accessory winning port 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is received by the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, a normal prize, by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are implanted between the attacker unit 2400 and the game ball B. It is guided to enter at the same probability with respect to either the mouth 2003 or the left part of the normal winning opening 2003.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted rearward and the first guide passage in the overlap portion 2520a. After being aligned in the front-rear direction with 2521, it is twisted forward and discharged from the left outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is a portion of the left side of the normal winning port 2003 or the normal winning port 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted with the attacker unit 2400. And, in rare cases, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  Then, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharge opening 2435 that is lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. Further, the game ball B that has entered the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the normal prize opening sensor 2401, a bonus such as a normal lottery is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left portion of the normal winning opening 2003 abuts against the plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421. Note that the game ball B that has entered the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 rarely passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening guide shelf 2421 and enters the attacker right passage 2430. May enter. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down on the second start-up port guide shelf 2421 passes between the second start-up port guide shelf 2421 and the second start-up port left standing wall portion 2422 and then flows down to the big winning port guide shelf 2424. .

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so the second start There is a possibility that the game ball B passing between the upper guidance shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 may be received by the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is given.

  The game ball B that has passed between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 and has flowed onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424, is the big winning opening 2005 from the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424. To the site above. Then, when the game ball B is released from the grand prize opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the “hit” is drawn or when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B released to the left from the mouth guide shelf 2424 will be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By the detection of the game ball B by the big prize opening sensor 2403, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. Note that the game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is received in any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005. If not, it is discharged from the lower outlet 1008 of the gaming area 5a to the lower rear of the gaming panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a.

  In addition, although the case where it hits right was demonstrated above, the game ball B thrown in by the strength which jumps over the entrance of the 2nd guide passage 2522 opened near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510, The first guide passage 2521 is entered, and the same result as described above is obtained.

  As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521 by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400. The possibility of being accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 is high.

  By the way, when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and “small hit” is selected as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, The provided prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the sorting rotating body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 and the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the “small hit” is drawn, the winning prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that the player can receive the gaming ball B in the winning prize winning opening 2006. “Right-handed” can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the first guide passage 2521 in which the mouth 2006 is provided.

  In this embodiment, “small hit” has a higher probability of being drawn than “big hit”, and “small hit” includes “first small hit”, “second small hit”, and “third small hit”. Three patterns are set, and in any pattern, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opened and closed twice.

  First, the opening / closing of the prize winning opening 2006 for each “small hit” will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 122, in the “first small hit”, after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is in an open state for a short time (80 ms) and then in a closed state. After a short time (1252 ms), the open state is again closed for a short time (80 ms), and then the closed state is completed. In the “second small hit”, after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms) and then closed, and then the “first small hit” is selected. After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a long time (9414 ms) and then the closed state is completed. In the “third small hit”, after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms) and then closed, and then the “second small hit” is selected. After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a long time (9404 ms) and then the closed state is completed.

  The second open state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the “first small hit” is started after the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the “third small hit” is started after the time when the “second small hit” is completed from the start of execution.

  In FIG. 122, in the second long time open state in “second small hit” and “third small hit”, eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). . In other words, the accessory prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for “first small hit” and nine times for “second small hit” and “third small hit”.

  Next, the operation of the sorting rotator 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 in the “small hit” is 1 in which the container 2531a is turned upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms) by rotating counterclockwise simultaneously with the start of execution. When the storage unit 2531a is turned clockwise and the storage unit 2531a cannot be stored in the rightward storage state after a predetermined time (4560 ms), the second time (13446 ms) is reached. After being in a non-accommodable state for a short time (500 ms), after entering the third accommodable state for the same time (13446 ms) as the second time, the incapable state is entered.

  In the sorting rotator 2531, the first accommodating state ends in the middle of the first opening state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the “small hit” and becomes an unaccommodating state. In addition, the sorting rotator 2531 enters the second accommodation state after the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of “first small hit”, the control of the sorting rotator 2531 is completed before the second accommodating state, and the second and third accommodating states are not executed. In this sorting rotator 2531, the second accommodating state is started before the second open state of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit”, and the second opened state is the closed state. After that, it becomes impossible to accommodate.

  In addition, the sorting rotator 2531 enters the third accommodation state after the time when the “second small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of “second small hit”, the control of the sorting rotator 2531 is finished before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. That is, the sorting rotator 2531 can be accommodated once when “first small hit”, twice when “second small hit”, and three times when “third small hit”. In this sorting rotator 2531, the third accommodating state is started before the second opening state of the accessory winning award 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the second opening state is ended. And then closed.

  Next, the operation of the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 in the “small hit” is the first closed state in which the second losing port 2535 is closed for a predetermined time (3020 ms) by protruding forward simultaneously with the start of execution ( The first V prize winning port 2007 is ready to be distributed), and then retreats to open the second loser opening 2535 (the state of distribution to the third distribution device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms). ) After a lapse of time (13446 ms) longer than the first open state, the second closed state and then the open state.

  The first closed state of the sorting door 2544 ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “small hit” state, and becomes the open state. The second sorting device 2540 starts the second closing state of the sorting door 2544 from the middle of the second opening state of the accessory winning award 2006 at the “third small hit”. After the second open state in 2006 becomes the closed state, the sorting door 2544 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only at the “third small hit”, and at the “first small hit” or “second small hit”, The second closed state of the minute door 2544 is not executed.

  For this reason, in the “first small hit”, the opening / closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is executed twice in a short time, so that the game that circulates through the first guide passage 2521 by “right-handed”. There is a low possibility that the ball B will be accepted into the prize winning prize opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the prize winning hole 2006 for the “second small hit” and “third small hit” is also short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B can be received in the bonus winning prize 2006. Is low. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the sorting rotator 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the accessory winning award 2006 in “small hit” is the prize winning award Since it is shorter than the time of the first open state of 2006, the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port 2006 is in the first opened state is the housing portion of the sorting rotator 2531. The possibility of being accommodated in 2531a is even lower. And since the time which the 1st accommodation possible state of the distribution rotary body 2531 and the 1st closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the 2nd distribution apparatus 2540 complete | finish is the same, the distribution rotary body 2531 In the first accommodable state, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a are not distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 side.

  On the other hand, in the second open state of the accessory winning award slot 2006 at “second small hit” and “third small hit”, the game ball B passes through the first guide passage 2521 and the prize is awarded for the bonus because the time is long. There is a high possibility of being accepted into the mouth 2006. At this time, the sorting rotator 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the prize winning opening 2006 is opened, and the prize winning opening 2006 is closed from the open state. Therefore, it is highly possible that the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 in the second open state is stored in the storage portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531. .

  As described above, in this example, it is unlikely that the game ball B is received in the prize winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “second small hit” and “third small hit”. In addition, the possibility that the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the first open state is further low. Nevertheless, simultaneously with the start of the execution of the small hit gaming state, the sorting rotator 2531 is rotated counterclockwise so that the accommodating portion 2531a can be accommodated upward, and the accommodating portion 2531a is placed in a predetermined period (3020 ms). After turning upward, the storage unit 2531a is rotated in the clockwise direction so that the storage portion 2531a cannot be stored rightward. That is, immediately after the start of the small hit gaming state, there is a low possibility that the sorting rotator 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first athletic passage 2536 side, but the sorting rotator 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first attrition passage 2536. The sorting operation by the sorting rotating body 2531 is shown in advance by performing the sorting operation on the side.

  Similarly, although it is unlikely that the sorting rotator 2531 will distribute the game balls B to the first athletic passage 2536 immediately after the start of the small hit gaming state, the second sorting device is simultaneously executed with the start of the small hit gaming state. The distribution door 2544 of 2540 protrudes forward to close the second loser opening 2535 so that it can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007, retreats after a predetermined time (3020 ms), and retreats to the second loser opening 2535. Is opened, so that the state of distribution to the third sorting device 2550 is established. That is, although it is unlikely that the sorting door 2544 will distribute the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 immediately after the start of the small hit gaming state, the sorting door 2544 will distribute the gaming ball B to the first V winning opening 2007. The sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is shown in advance by performing the sorting operation to the side.

  In this example, the sorting rotator 2531 and the sorting door 2544 are produced at the same time as the execution of the small hit gaming state, that is, an effect at the start of the small hit gaming state (for example, an opening effect of the small hit gaming state, The action prize winning opening 2006 is the first time after the operation of the sorting rotating body 2531 and the sorting door 2544. Will be open. Thereby, the possibility of the distribution of the game ball B to the first athletic passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution of the game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544 is reduced. doing. In addition, there is no possibility of distribution of the game ball B to the first athletic passage 2536 side by the distribution rotating body 2531 and distribution of the game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544. Alternatively, as long as it is infinitely low, the prize winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time simultaneously with the operation of the sorting rotating body 2531 and the sorting door 2544.

  Further, only one of the sorting rotator 2531 and the sorting door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. In other words, a part of the movable parts (sorting rotating body 2531, sorting door 2544) for sorting the game balls won in the prize winning opening 2006 is operated in advance to show the sorting operation. Other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the sorting door 2544 that has a high possibility of entering a game ball into the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007 in this example) (having a high V winning expectation degree) should not be operated in advance. Further, it is less likely that the game ball will enter the V prize opening (in this example, the second V prize opening 2008) than the distribution door 2544 (only the distribution rotating body 2531 is operated in advance). You may do it. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance some of the distribution destinations of the game balls won in the variable winning opening 2006, the other distribution destinations can be in an unknown state, and other distribution destinations become clear. As a result of the increase in the number of distribution destinations, the player can be surprised and the expectation can be enhanced, and the game balls that are distributed can be watched and enjoyed, and the decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed. Can do.

  In addition, by moving the movable part (distribution door 2544) having a high V-winning expectation degree in advance so as not to be operated in advance, concealing its existence and making the player think that a game ball enters the third distribution device 2550. When the third small hit is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) having a high V winning expectation operates to cause the game ball to enter the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). In addition to giving unexpectedness, the game interest can be improved by entering the game ball into an unforeseen distribution destination. In addition, the distribution to the first V prize opening 2007 side is concealed as a distribution destination, and it can be assumed that there are only two of the first loser opening 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side. However, even if the second small hit with low V winning expectation is executed and the game balls are distributed to the third sorting device 2550 side, the player is not disappointed.

  Further, in this example, the sorting rotating body 2531 is arranged in a mode that can be easily seen by the player, whereas the sorting door 2544 is a flat plate that moves forward and backward with respect to the game board 5 and has an area on the front side. Because it is narrow, even if it is operating, it is difficult to notice its operation. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the first V prize opening 2007 side that can be entered when the sorting door 2544 protrudes forward. For this reason, when the third small hit is made, the sorting door 2544 operates to make it difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball when the game ball enters the first V winning opening 2007, and the game ball becomes the first V Without noticing that the player has entered the winning opening 2007, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if a sudden V winning has occurred and a 15R jackpot has been executed.

  In addition, when the sorting rotator 2531 is operated in advance during the opening effect in the small hit gaming state, in addition to the instruction content in the opening effect, for example, “Aim at the winning prize winning opening 2006”, the sorting rotator 2531. By this operation, the player can easily recognize the driving destination, that is, the position to be aimed during the small hit gaming state.

  As described above, when the “small hit” is drawn, the game ball B that has flowed down the first guide passage 2521 is received in the prize winning slot 2006 when the prize winning slot 2006 is opened. And then sent to the first sorting guide path 2534 of the first sorting device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the prize winning port sensor 2513, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  Among the “small hits”, in the “second small hit”, since the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is in the open state when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, the sorting rotation is performed. When the body 2531 rotates from the accommodable state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first athletic passage 2536 and the second distribution guiding path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. , And flows through the second loss passage 2546 from the second loss outlet 2543 at the lower end and is sent to the third sorting device 2550 side.

  The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 side is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, and then supplied to the croon 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551. Turn. And it is received by either the 2nd V prize opening 2008 and the two 3rd loser holes 2556 by being repelled by the distribution rotating blade 2554 always rotating by the 3rd distribution drive motor 2555. Then, the game ball B received in the second V prize opening 2008 is passed to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 through the third allocating ball discharge passage 2557, After being detected by the 2V prize opening sensor 3003, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loser opening 2556 is transferred to the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 through the third sorting ball discharge passage 2557, After being detected by the lost mouth sensor 3004, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the second V prize opening sensor 3003, a privilege to open and close the special prize opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

  On the other hand, in the “third small hit”, since the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is closed when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the second opened state, the sorting rotating body 2531 is closed. Is rotated from the accommodable state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a flows down the second distribution guiding path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first athletic passage 2536. Then, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544 in the closed state, is guided rightward, and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 through the first V winning path 2542 and then discharged from the back right sphere of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3130. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a privilege to open and close the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

  For this reason, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is allowed to receive the game ball B, and “small hit”, “big hit”, etc. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result must be drawn. When the game ball B is shot so as to flow down the left side of the center object 2500, there is an opportunity to be received at the first start port 2002, but there is no opportunity to be received at the second start port 2004.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520 including two of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Although there is an opportunity to be accepted by the normal winning port 2003 for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 even if both pass through the passage, the first guidance is made by “right-handed” for easy driving operation. If the passage 2521 is distributed, there is a possibility of entering the attacker right passage 2430 that is sent to the out port 1008 without an opportunity to be received at the normal winning opening 2003 or the like, and the game ball B is distributed to the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. In order to allow the second starting port 2004 to receive the game ball B, it is necessary to cause the normal winning port 2003 to receive the game ball B and to derive the “normal winning” normal lottery result. The second start port 2004 is lower than the first start port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002. The operation of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. Can raise the expectation for the acceptance of.

  Then, when the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002, when the “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes. In order to allow the ball B to be received, the operation for driving the game ball B is changed to “right-handed”, and the game ball B can be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in which the prize winning hole 2006 is provided. It is possible to increase the expectation for the reception of the game ball B to the winning prize winning opening 2006.

  Even if the game ball B that has been struck to the right side of the center bonus 2500 is not received in the bonus winning hole 2006, there is a possibility that it will be received in the downstream normal winning slot 2003. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the second start opening 2004 that has been opened in accordance with the result of the normal lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to, and as the second special lottery result, “small hit” or “big hit” May be drawn.

  When the game ball B struck into the first guide passage 2521 is received in the prize winning opening 2006, the game ball B is sent to the first sorting device 2530. Therefore, the game ball B is placed in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531. Players can be thrilled by whether they are housed or not.

  When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540. The player can be excited and excited by whether the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning port 2007 or the second loser port 2543 in the distribution device 2540. In the second distribution device 2540, even if the game ball B is distributed to the second loser opening 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loser passage 2546 and has the second V winning opening 2008. Since it is sent to the minute device 2550, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the second V prize opening 2008, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The game balls B distributed to the second loser opening 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 are supplied to the croon 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 and turn on the clown 2553. The player can be thrilled by whether or not it is received in the second V prize opening 2008 when it is bounced to the peripheral wall side by the distribution rotating blade 2554 at the center of the croon 2553, so that the player can be entertained. be able to.

  When the game ball B is received in the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special ball ball B is received. When “big hit” is drawn as the lottery result and the second special lottery result, an opportunity for a lot of game balls B to be paid out by opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 in a predetermined pattern, The game ball B can be driven to aim at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the open / close grand prize opening 2005.

  At this time, the probability that the game ball B reaches the winning prize opening 2005 is higher when the second guide passage 2522 is distributed than when the first guide passage 2521 is distributed. It is possible to adjust the driving strength so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 while avoiding “right hitting”, and it is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game ball B.

  By the way, the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has a heavy portion 2520a in which a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage the game ball B is circulating, so the player should have entered the second guide passage 2522 but entered the first guide passage 2521. It can be thought that the game ball B is circulating in the guide passage group 2520. In addition, the game ball B that has been shot aiming at the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. , It can increase the expectation of the game, and when it comes out of the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, it can surprise the player with surprise and entertain the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8 g. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center character]
Subsequently, the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 according to an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. 124 (a) to (d) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from FIG. 116, and FIGS. 125 (e) and (f) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a further different guide passage group. It is. In FIGS. 124 and 125, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124 (a), compared to FIG. 116, the distance at which the upper end entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is separated to the left with respect to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is increased. It is a thing. This guide passage group 2520 can provide the same effects as described above.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124 (b), the angle of the hitting portion 1006 is such that the hitting ball 1006 in the front component member 1000 is likely to rebound to the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. And the portion of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is inclined so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lowered. It has been made. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 side, so the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B into which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 becomes wider. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the two guide passages 2522.

  The embodiment shown in FIG. 124 (c) has the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 facing upward in the guide passage group 2520 of FIG. 116 and FIGS. 124 (a) and (b). In contrast to the opening, the upstream side of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extends to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective inlets are lined up and down. It is made to open toward the left in the state.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5 a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is a part of the second guide passage 2522. Part. In this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2505 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) is the first guide from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. The length to the respective entrances of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is narrower than the upstream space portion 2505 shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength that comes into contact with the narrower portion on the left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, Since it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving strength that directly enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens toward the left, the game ball is compared with the embodiment of FIG. The adjustment range of B driving strength is narrowed. In addition, a game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 on the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 divides the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When it comes into contact with the left end of the wall portion (the portion between the two entrances), there is a possibility of deviating from the upstream space portion 2505 depending on the momentum and angle of the bounced game ball B to the left. That is, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2505 and does not enter either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center object 2500 may be distributed. For this reason, since the difficulty level for the game ball B driving operation is increased, the player's willingness to drive the game ball B can be increased, and the player can insert game media. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124 (d), in the embodiment shown in FIG. 124 (c), a branching portion 2524 that is in one-way communication with the second guide passage 2522 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. It is. The branching portion 2524 is provided immediately above a portion bent downward from the right end of a portion (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) extending in the left and right directions in the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is struck with the strength to enter the first guide passage 2521, the game sphere B is second in the branch portion 2524 depending on the strength of the stake (if the drive strength is weak). Since branching to the guide passage 2522 side, the difficulty of circulation of the game ball B with respect to the second guide passage 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 124 (c).

  In order to allow the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to drive the game ball B weaker than the driving strength of the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion bent downward in the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not jump upward (branch portion 2524 side) and does not enter the first guide passage 2521 side through the branch portion 2524. In other words, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in one way.

  Further, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first guide passage 2521, the first guide passage 2521 side is located at the branch portion 2524. Alternatively, since the branch is made to branch to the second guide passage 2522 side, the player can be throbbing or throbbing depending on whether the game ball B branches to the branch part 2524, and the first guide It is possible to entertain the flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Since the branching portion 2524 of the first guide passage 2521 may branch to the second guide passage 2522 side, whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side may cause the player to It can be thrilled and entertained by the player, and when the branching portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side, a player's driving operation mistake is covered and the desired second guide passage 2522 is opened. The game ball B will be distributed, and it can be made to the feeling obtained with respect to a player, and the fall of the interest with respect to a player's game can be suppressed.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (e), the second guide passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that traverses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position on the left side of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. Accordingly, all of the game balls B that are driven into the upstream space portion 2505 above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 circulate through the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the distribution of the game ball B can be made conspicuous from the player, if the game ball B distributes through the bypass portion 2525 to the player, it can be thought that there is something good after that. Allow the player to perform a game ball B driving operation aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and to entertain the game ball B to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (f), the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are arranged in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 in the upstream space portion 2505, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear, and the game ball that has circulated along the front surface of the game panel 1100. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the stopper portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is inclined so that a portion in the vicinity of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes rearward, and faces the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has been driven vigorously can be reflected to the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other in the front-rear direction, a game that has been driven into the upstream space portion 2505 above the center accessory 2500. It can be difficult to determine which passage the ball B has entered, and can draw attention to the player.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first unit provided in the start port unit 2100. A first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in one start port 2002, and a second V prize port sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 of the center accessory 2500. And a third losing port sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B received in the third losing port 2556 of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 136).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a and enters the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the bonus winning opening 2006. Out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting unaccepted game sphere B (game sphere B for which no privilege is given), light guide plate effect unit 3100 provided at the front end of back box 3010, and light guide plate effect unit 3100 , And a rear effect unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010 at the rear.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the left on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction on the right side of

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the back rendering unit 3200, and the like.

[5-9a. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out ball detection unit 3030 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130 and the like. 126A is a front view of the out sphere detection unit in the back unit, FIG. 126B is a right side view of the out sphere detection unit, and FIG. 126C is a rear view of the out sphere detection unit. ) Is a perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as viewed from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out sphere detection unit from the lower right front position. (G) is the perspective view which looked at the out ball detection unit from the lower right back. FIG. 127 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out sphere detection unit as seen from the back.

  FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detection unit, and FIG. 128 (b) is a perspective view showing the game panel with the out-ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. FIG. 129 is an enlarged cross-sectional view as seen from the right side after assembling the game board and cutting it up and down at the center of the right sensor of the out port. FIG. 130 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in a state assembled to the game board.

  The out-ball detecting unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and includes a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, and an accessory. This is for detecting a game ball B that has not been accepted into the winning opening 2006 (a game ball B to which no privilege has been given, also referred to as “out ball”). In the present embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is detected. The out sphere detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the back lower sphere discharge unit 3120 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100.

  The out-ball detection unit 3030 is inserted into the out recess 1101 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and a unit main body 3031 attached to the front surface of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, and an out-port left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. 3032 and an outlet right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear side of the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033.

  The unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and a partition portion 3031b that divides the inside of the cylindrical portion 3031a into left and right. The flange portion 3031c projecting in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 that are recessed forward from the rear end side of the cylindrical portion are inserted. Insertion recess 3031d. The cylindrical portion 3031a has a front end that is substantially the same size as the out port 1008 in the front component member 1000, is long in the left and right directions, and is inclined so that the lower inner surface is lowered toward the rear side.

  The partition part 3031b is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylinder part 3031a, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3031b is curved so that the front end side protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so as to move backward as it goes upward so that the front side is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a.

  The outlet left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The outlet right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. The outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

  The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B that has passed through the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a at the center in the left-right direction.

  In the out-ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit main body 3031 is attached to the front surface of the back lower sphere discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 (see FIG. 129). In addition, the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out-recessed portion 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031 c is the game panel 1100. (See FIGS. 128 and 129).

  In the state where the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the front end upper portion of the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 projects forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (FIG. 129). See). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 129).

  The out-ball detecting unit 3030 has a game ball B guided backward by the out-guiding unit 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component member 1000 in the game area 5a. The gas is supplied into the cylindrical portion 3031a, detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, and then discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed without being brought into contact with the board holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting unit 3030 of the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and Since it is possible to detect the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been received in any of the prize winning holes 2006, for example, the reception of the game ball B into a specific winning hole is continuously detected. In spite of the fact that the “out ball” is not detected, it means that an illegal act is performed for a specific winning opening, and it can be notified that the illegal act is performed.

  Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory The ratio of “safe balls” in the pachinko machine 1 can be determined from the number of “safe balls” counted by the detection of the game balls B received in the winning opening 2006 and the number of “out balls”.

  Further, in the out ball detection unit 3030, the left and right out port left sensors 3032 and 3033 are partitioned by a partition 3031b, so that the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 Can be guided to the out mouth left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out mouth right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be mainly detected by the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, it is determined whether the player tends to be “left-handed” or “right-handed” based on the number of game balls B detected per hour by the out-mouth left sensor 3032 and the out-mouth right sensor 3033. Based on the determination, it is possible to enter the game that is intended by encouraging the optimal driving operation for the gaming situation.

  Further, since the forward projection of the partition portion 3031b is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, when a large number of game balls B enter the out port 1008 per time, the relatively game balls of the partition portion 3031b The game ball B can be released to the left or right side where the circulation amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged without stagnation at the out port 1008.

  Further, since the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes downward from the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening. 2005 and the game ball B (“safe ball”) that is received in the prize winning hole 2006 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward in the out ball detection unit 3030 and the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor. Detection at 3033 can be prevented, and only the “out ball” can be detected accurately.

  In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the out ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1101. And can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  Further, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("all balls") thrown into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("all balls") discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, the out ball detection unit 3030 detects only the “out ball”, so the numbers of “out ball”, “safe ball”, and “whole ball” are compared. Thus, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-9b. Light guide plate production unit]
Next, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. 131 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the light guide plate effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 131 (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern substrate in the light guide plate rendering unit from the front. FIG. 133A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is caused to emit light, and FIG. 133B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is caused to emit light.

  The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and the unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. Attached to the unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 and a first pattern substrate 3103 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted. And a second pattern substrate 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 covers the front of the transparent plate-like diffusion lens 3105 provided between the first pattern substrate 3103 and the light guide plate 3102, and the first pattern substrate 3103 and the diffusion lens 3105. Is attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101, and is attached to the left side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front side of the back decorative body 3106 having a relief-like decoration on the front and the second pattern substrate 3104. A strip-shaped left substrate cover 3107.

  The light guide plate effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower front portion of the unit base 3101, and the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the center bonus 2500 in the center accessory 2500. A back lower ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the received game ball B and discharges it downward to the second V prize winning port 2008 and the third loser hole 2556 of the tri-distribution device 2550 and a lower right side of the unit base 3101 are attached. The back right ball discharge unit 3130 for receiving the game ball B received in the first loser opening 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the center accessory 2500 and discharging it downward, and the back lower ball discharge unit 3120 Attached to cool the third sorting drive motor 2555 of the center accessory 2500 A cooling fan 3140 is provided at a portion to be the rear of the warp inlet 2501 in the center won game 2500, (the not shown) a magnetic sensor for detecting the magnetism acting improperly are provided with a.

  The light guide plate 3102 includes a first pattern 3102a (see FIG. 133 (a)) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex first reflecting portions that reflect only light from above to the front, and only light from the left side. 2nd pattern 3102b (refer FIG. 133 (b)) formed by the uneven | corrugated innumerable 2nd reflection part which reflects the front. That is, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 can cause the first pattern 3102a to emit light when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 emits light, and emit the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 to emit light. 3102b can be lit and displayed.

  The light guide plate 3102 has fine irregularities in each of the innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3102a and the innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3102b. In the state where the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not emitting light, it looks transparent and the rear effect unit 3200 and the effect display device 1600 of the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side. The effect image displayed on the screen can be visually recognized in a good state.

  The first pattern 3102a is a pattern imitating the surroundings of one eye of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 133 (a). Further, the second pattern 3102b is a pattern composed of characters “CHANCE!” As shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 includes a lower notch 3102c that is notched upward from the lower side, and a right notch 3102d that is notched to the left from the right side. The lower notch 3102c is for preventing contact with the croon 2553 of the third sorting device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the right notch 3102d is the rear in the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500. This is to prevent contact with the second guide passage 2522 twisted.

  The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three in the left-right direction. The second pattern substrate 3104 is divided into two in the vertical direction. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are full-color LEDs.

  The back ball discharge unit 3120 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. A second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, a third lose mouth sensor 3004 that detects the gaming ball B received in the third lose opening 2556, and Is provided.

  The back bottom ball discharge unit 3120 can discharge the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second V winning port 2008, and the third loser port 2556 onto the substrate holder 1200. it can. An out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the back lower ball discharge unit 3120.

[5-9c. Back production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The back effect unit 3200 is attached in the back box 3010 behind the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back effect unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorative bodies so as to surround the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 in a front view. Behind these decorative bodies is provided a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted. Therefore, by appropriately emitting the LEDs on the decorative board, a plurality of decorative bodies can be illuminated and decorated, and the player can show the light emission effect by the decorative bodies.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 134 and FIG. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit. The game board 5 produces the light guide plate effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The unit 3100 and the back effect unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 134, it is mounted on the second picture board 3104 arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 when viewed from the front. The plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light to decorate the second pattern 3102b. Thereby, the character “CHAHCE!” Is light-decorated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance. It is possible to suppress the decline of the interest by making it seem that there is no hope and raising the expectation for the game.

  In addition, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 are caused to emit light. The first pattern 3102a is decorated with light emission. Accordingly, the eyes of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the player can be surprised. In addition to giving a strong impact, it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state such as “big hit game” occurs, and the expectation of the game can be enhanced.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described light emission effect by the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 It can also be combined with an image (display effect). As a result, various combinations of lighting effects, display effects, etc. can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and various effects to It can be entertained and it can suppress that a player's interest in a game falls.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning mouth sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning mouth 2001, the normal winning mouth sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the normal winning mouth 2003, and the big winning mouth 2005. The big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, the winning combination prize sensor 2513 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the winning combination prize opening 2006, and the gaming ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007 First V winning port sensor 2514 to be detected, first lost port sensor 2515 to detect the game ball B received in the first lost port 2535, and second V winning port 20 8, a second V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B received in the third game ball B, a third lose hole sensor 3004 for detecting the game ball B received in the third lose hole 2556, and a game ball received in the out port 1008 Detection signals from the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 for detecting B, the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are respectively input via the main control I / O ports. The

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the accessory prize winning port solenoid 2512, A drive signal is output to the first distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, etc., the status display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, the normal symbol display, the normal hold display, A drive signal is output to the first special symbol display, the first special reservation number display, the second special symbol display, the second special reservation number display, the round display, and the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the normal winning port sensor 2401, the big winning port sensor 2403, the bonus winning port sensor 2513, the first V winning port sensor 2514, the first A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the one-losing mouth sensor 2515, the second V prize winning hole sensor 3003, the third loser mouth sensor 3004, the out mouth left sensor 3032, and the out mouth right sensor 3033. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the normal winning port 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the normal start port 2003 The detection of the game ball B by the winning prize sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, the proximity winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation. .

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 136, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are on one semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC for performing high-quality sound, and sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC And a stored sound ROM.

  In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC The CPU of the control IC sends the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 to the serial I / O for the lamp driving board. The game board side drive data for the game board decoration drive board is transmitted from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and outputs a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5. Transmission from the serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button ascending / descending Door side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic motor 367 and the like, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal for a color LED provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port or displayed on the effect display device 1600. Command) from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, and in addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC. To do.

  A detection signal from the third distribution detection sensor 2552 of the center accessory 2500 provided in the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512. Based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the own system is running away.

  A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2. Kilo (k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive command, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the gaming board 5 side are a plurality of serial inputs / outputs different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  This display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116, FIG. 119 to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the game ball B can be driven stronger as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N, so that the game ball The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided in the game area 5a above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest part (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510), While coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N, the region on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. When the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, the central discharge portion 2503a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first probability is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  There is a possibility that the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be received in the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, or the open large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100. is there.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the game ball B is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. May be received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. Part 2505), it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and is released above the normal winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500, After coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the normal winning opening 2003, it is accepted to the normal winning opening 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006, and an entrance opened at a left interval from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space 2505, and hits the stopper 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not contact (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right hit), the player enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 depending on the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, the second guide passage 2522 is more circulated than the first guide passage 2521 so that it can be accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

  When the game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2003 and detected by the normal winning port sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of games from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When the ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201 and a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port closed in the attacker unit 2400 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  Note that if the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 after the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result may be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result ends. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results held is limited to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The game ball B that has entered the right attacker passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released on the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 without an opportunity to be received at the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005. The game is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed the left side of the normal winning port 2003 passes between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 and then passes through the big winning port guide shelf 2424. , Passing through the front of the closed big prize opening 2005 and discharged onto the lower right rail 1004.

  Then, when the game ball B passes between the second start port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start port left standing wall portion 2422, the normal lottery result lottered by receiving the game ball B at the normal winning port 2003 is “ When the second start opening door 2411 is moving forward with “normal hit”, the game ball B is guided by the second start opening door 2411 and the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B that has not been guided by the second start door 2411 falls onto the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 and passes through the front of the closed big prize opening door 2413 from the left end of the big prize opening guidance shelf 2424 to the right. It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004 and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that has been guided to the second start port 2004 side by the second start port door 2411 but has not been received by the second start port 2004 due to the second start port door 2411 retreating on the way. It enters into the attacker right passage 2430 from the lower third opening 2433 of the start port 2004 and is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing through the front of the closed large winning opening door 2413, and from the out port 1008. It is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second start-up upper guide shelf 2421, and the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is opened, The game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out-out port 1008 without being involved in the special winning opening 2005.

  As described above, the game balls B that have circulated through the first guide passage 2521 are not so much received in the normal winning opening 2003, and therefore the second starting opening 2004 is received by receiving the gaming balls B in the normal winning opening 2003. The normal lottery result in which is opened is rarely derived, and the game ball B is not received much at the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 is received at the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521. There is a high possibility that a normal lottery result (“normal hit”) in which is opened will be drawn, and there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received at the second starting port 2004.

  For this reason, since the player performs a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505 is performed. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the driving strength at which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522. Don't be. Thereby, it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored by giving a change to the operation of driving the game ball B, and to make the player enter the operation of driving the game ball B and to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit” The lottery of the special lottery result that generates “small hit”, “per time reduction (shortening of time)” is performed, and the lottery special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, (It is also referred to as “special variation time.”) The special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 includes “losing”, “ “First small hit”, “second small hit”, “third small hit”, “2R big hit”, “15R big hit”, etc. In this embodiment, the second special lottery rather than the first special lottery result. The result is "small hit" ("first Per "," second Koatari ", lottery probability of" third Koatari ") is set to be higher.

  If the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is “small hit”, ”Is opened / closed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern (see FIG. 122). Since the winning prize winning opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when the “small hit” is drawn, “right-handed”, the first guide passage The game ball B is shot into 2521.

  When the “small hit” is “first small hit”, the opening / closing time of the prize winning opening 2006 is short, and the game ball B can hardly be received. In the case of “second small hit” or “third small hit”, it takes a long time for the bonus winning prize opening 2006 to be open, and the game ball B is accepted into the bonus winning prize winning 2006 by “right-handed”. Probability is high. When the game ball B is received at the prize winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the game ball B is received at the prize winning opening 2006 when the “small hit” is “second bonus” or “third bonus”, one of the received game balls B is assigned to the first allocation. The device 2530 is housed in the housing portion 2531 a of the sorting rotator 2531. When the “small hit” is “second hit”, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531 passes through the second sorting device 2540 and the third sorting device 2550. Supplied on the Kroon 2553. After that, it is bounced by the sorting rotary blade 2554 and distributed to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loser port 2556. When the game ball B is received (assigned) to the second V winning opening 2008, “15R big hit” is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the third loser opening 2556, “15R big hit” or the like is not executed and the previous state is restored.

  On the other hand, when the “small hit” is “third hit”, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 is moved to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the second sorting device 2540. Distribution is performed, and “15R big hit” is executed.

  The first special lottery result and the first lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008, and receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 If the result of the 2 special lottery is “2R jackpot” or “15R jackpot”, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, or When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the big prize opening 2005 is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is set) that makes the game balls B unacceptable. A “big hit” game is executed by repeating a predetermined number of times (referred to as one round) (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, two rounds or 15 rounds).

  Since the big prize opening 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center bonus 2500, the player is allowed to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center bonus 2500. Can do. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  The guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is easier to perform the driving operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side. Since it is less likely to be accepted into the grand prize opening 2005 than the side, it is possible to make the player select which passage the aiming operation is to be performed, making it difficult for the player to get bored with various games A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when “15R big hit” or “2R big hit” occurs during the short-running state, lottery is performed by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 after the “big hit” game is over. The special symbol variation time for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is made shorter than usual until the predetermined variation number (for example, 100 times) is reached. The time until the “win” of the lottery is drawn.

  Further, in the “big hit” game aiming at the big winning opening 2005, the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 exist in the middle of the game ball B reaching the big winning opening 2005. The game ball B is likely to be received by the second starting port 2004, and if the next “big hit” or “small hit” is drawn during the “big hit” game, the player has an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous Will continue for a long time, and the player can be more entertained.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, “small hit” game, “big hit” game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, etc. using the effect unit 3200, etc. as appropriate, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can do.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 of this embodiment are the guide passages of the present invention, and the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment, The second start opening 2004 and the big prize winning opening 2005 correspond to the privilege grant section of the present invention, respectively.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is the first in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When either of the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 is received into the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side, a predetermined privilege (with a predetermined number of game balls B paid out, Normal lottery whether or not to open and close the second starting port 2004) is given, so that the player is allowed to perform the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 having the normal winning port 2003 A game can be performed.

  Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are twisted so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction in the heavy duty portion 2520a in the middle of the left-right direction, On the upper entrance side, the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 are arranged in the left-right direction, and the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 can be clearly distinguished. The game ball B can be made to be easily struck by the operation of driving the game ball B, and the game ball B can be operated for the desired first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522.

  On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, since it is twisted so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction in the heavy viewing portion 2520a, the player against the game ball B circulating in the part It is difficult to discriminate which guide passage is circulating from the player, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game balls B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. it can. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 make it possible to see the game ball B being guided (distributed) from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed of a transparent member. Therefore, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap each other at the portion of the heavy viewing portion 2520a arranged in the front and rear, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at a glance. Can be. Furthermore, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction on the exit side below the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly discriminated, since they are twisted twice on the upstream side, the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the inlet side The relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side can be discriminated and unclear.

  Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is difficult to understand where the game ball B comes out when the game ball B is driven (entered) into one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It can be difficult to recognize what the game result will be after the group 2520 is distributed, and the game ball B will be inserted into any of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 so that a normal prize is won. Since it is difficult to know whether the possibility of being accepted into the mouth 2003 is high, when the game ball B is struck, it is possible to care about which guide passage the game ball B circulates and distribute the player The game ball B that is being played can be noted.

  In addition, when the player pays attention to the game ball B circulating in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the guide passage (second guide is likely to be received in the normal winning opening 2003). The player can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522), and can increase the expectation for the game, and an unexpected exit (exit of the first guide passage 2521) ), The player can be surprised by adding unexpectedness, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is likely to be received in the normal winning port 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B. However, it is possible to adjust the driving strength of the game ball B to be driven. Therefore, a difficulty level can be given to the operation of driving the game ball B, and it is possible to make the player hard to get bored by a change in the operation of driving the game ball B, and to the game ball to the player. B's driving operation can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have a portion of the overlapping portion 2520a aligned in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction is allowed at that portion. Since it can be made as narrow as possible, it is relatively easy to secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the accessory winning prize opening 2006, the first distribution device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. And a pachinko machine 1 that can more entertain the player.

[10. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 136 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 137, and FIG. 139 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[10-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control, special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and an initial value for hit judgment used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating the big hit gaming state For the determination of the symbol random number to be used for the determination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display and the initial value of this symbol random number Symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and determination for this normal symbol per unit Normal value determination random number for normal symbol used for determination of initial value of random number for normal use and normal symbol for use in determination of variable display pattern of normal symbol variably displayed on normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values within the specified numerical range one after another, and once all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value within the predetermined numerical range and Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number when the value is acquired from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination.

  In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or in various processes stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information as a numerical value is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when it is not done, the main control MPU takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM and extracts the normal value determination random number per symbol. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for judgment per normal symbol based on the obtained ID code is executed. It has a mechanism that value is set. That is, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination is derived by using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. When the ID code is stored, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. Based on the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on this and the two-step security measure, the analysis is prevented.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is taken out from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU and this taken out ID code is used as an initial value determining random number for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are attached, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if a momentary power failure occurs at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable ball can be opened and closed to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2004 The gaming state that becomes can not be generated.

[10-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control by the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU”) for setting an initial value in the main control built-in WDT for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time until the main control MPU is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU) is reached by the time until the counted time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when determining in step S16 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (that is, a main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and game information relating to games such as unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) This is a flag indicating whether or not various information including the information indicating the counter value is erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing various information and a value of 0 when not erasing various information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of a power failure warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S24 that no power failure warning signal is input, it determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU uses the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off) described later as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, the main control MPU determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  In step S32, when the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the main control side power-off process has been completed normally, the main control MPU has the main control built-in RAM as the power recovery time. A work area is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. Therefore, the main control-side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S26, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, determines that various information is to be deleted, or in the determination in step S30. When the control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch instructing the RAM clear, when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or the main control side power supply When the disconnection process is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and a counter for determining a random number for determining a normal symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range is determined, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the normal symbol determination random number described above. Set to a random number.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state is used, and a random number is stored in a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU for updating by hardware. The setting such as latching and acquisition is performed, and activation of the hard random number circuit with built-in main control is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Once all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The other values are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information by creating a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command To remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning voltage as described above. The The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S54 that there is no power failure warning signal input, it performs non-winning random number update processing (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, symbol initial value determination random number, small hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning judgment (winning judgment) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination, initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal has not been input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S56. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU performs a RAM access prohibition setting (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. If the control cannot be performed, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU is forcedly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and the main control side power-on process is executed again. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power-off process at the time of power-off and the checksum calculated in step S28 when a forced reset is applied by the built-in reset circuit. Value (sum value) cannot match, and a check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or is momentarily stopped, and this main control side power-on process is performed by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous power failure. That is, even when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island in the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power supply to the facility is cut off until a time of about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is being performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the island facilities of the game hall In the case where the power supply from is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery. If a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the waiting time is reached, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged to is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within the period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side described later Even if timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-on processing is performed. Kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by a clerk such as a game hall clerk such as RAM clear, it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the above-described game backup information is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24. If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. Cannot, game information, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) Various information including can be prevented from being updated, so as never occurs is a change in the checksum calculation result. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation stored value of step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is performing the game, and the pachinko machine Even when the power to 1 is cut off, the game information by the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU by supplying the power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2. Step of backup processing for storing various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control side power-off process composed of the process of 58 to step S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU of the main control MPU When restarting, it is determined that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby allowing the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control side The charge charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as a direct current + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure notification signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to set the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12. The main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT and making it impossible to start the time measurement again.

  The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the WDT with built-in main control by such software, whereby the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main winning balls) are set by interrupt permission to prevent progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A mechanism is adopted in which it is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating information output determination counter values). Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) The various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for the counter), etc.) is completely covered by software so that the main control side power-off process is reliably completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, such as various pieces of information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter), etc., so that it is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is built in as transmission information Store in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, a problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the start solenoid 2412 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, A problem will be described in the case where the reservation setting of the command transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the special prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will transfer from the state closed by the member to the open state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the gaming state (whether or not it is in the short time state or the like) indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. . However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen in the big hit gaming state can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned based on the gaming state designated by the power-on state command received from There is no display at all. That is, for example, a main winning board 1 count display command that indicates the number of game balls that have been entered into the big winning opening 2005 and detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the main control board. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the game state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing the transition from the existing state to the closed state (that is, closing start of the round of the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round of the big hit gaming state (the fifth round), the attack solenoid 2414 is started to open from the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. To move to the current status (that is, the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the fifth round of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the gaming state described above and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a player indicating that the movable piece is open) that indicates that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece, and the second start opening is displayed. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while 2004 is open, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored to start driving the start port solenoid 2412 and close the movable piece. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen in the big hit gaming state based on the gaming state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display area and returned, a screen is displayed that informs the player that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player. The control board 1510 cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the game instruction screen for entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game he played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening / closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game is in the big hit gaming state and the attacker solenoid 2 14 is started and a screen is displayed to indicate that the grand prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game ball is inserted into the big prize opening. The screen that tells the player the message “Please play the game to play a ball” is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will receive the grand prize opening 2005 after power is restored. In the above example, for example, a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. When a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, driving of the start port solenoid 2412 is started to open the movable piece as a return destination of the main control board 1310. Screen indicating that the second starting port 2004 is open (for example, “A movable piece is open. Please play a game so that a game ball enters the second starting port.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. A game of making a ball can be instructed.

  As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, first, a power-on state command is transmitted, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, followed by a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored by power failure or instantaneous power failure). When clearing, information indicating that and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) It is comprised from the information which instruct | indicates in which game state it returns in a state and a non-time-short state, and the information which shows the model code of a pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What kind of game specifications (for example, when the probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbol variations (for example, 30 times or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as so-called ST machines) in which probability fluctuations occur in a state of being played.

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the workers on the manufacturing line can It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur).

  As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[10-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control timer interruption process is repeated at every interruption period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 137 and 138.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 139 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and normal electric symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later. Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and from the second starting opening sensor 2402. , Detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the prize winning prize sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V prize opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first lose mouth sensor 2515, second A detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 3003, a detection signal from the third lose mouth sensor 3004, a detection signal from the left out port sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and a RAM clear switch The payout control board 633 corrects an operation signal (RAM clear signal) and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Reading 払主 ACK signal from the dispensing control board 633 to convey the fact that it has received, respectively, is stored in the input information storage area of the main control chip RAM as input information. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command classified into the other corresponding to this is transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second start When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those in which the empty terminal process is performed) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Since it is possible to do so, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, A detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the prize winning prize sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V prize opening sensor 2514, the first lose mouth sensor 2515, a detection signal from the second V prize opening sensor 3003, a detection signal from the third loser mouth sensor 3004, a detection signal from the out mouth left sensor 3032 and the out mouth right sensor 3033, and from the magnetic sensor 2010 A payer ACK from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received a detection signal, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Signal reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 whether or not the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the vacant terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display informing that a failure has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the initial value determination random number for symbols, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for the winning symbol is also updated. The initial value determining random numbers for symbols and the initial value determining random numbers for small hits are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. On the other hand, since the design random number is a random number related to winning determination (winning determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter is incremented. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The normal value determination random number per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the normal symbol determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random numbers for normal symbol determination, the winning determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update processing. The normal value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are used as the non-winning random number in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. In the update process and the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the update is performed in the winning random number update process in step S106, but each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next interrupt is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the timer is generated, the symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit The design initial value determining random numbers may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Or create a self-check command to check the connection state between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main award ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the award ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the award ball When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. Created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on this input information. In order to notify that, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main winning ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2003 provided in the game board 5, Based on game balls that have entered the various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as “various winning ports provided on the game board 5”) such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005. The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and is updated and stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process in step S108. . In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls is over (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the fact, and as transmission information The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value is used as the main prize ball number information output determination counter value. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the main control MPU reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. If it is determined that fraudulent acts due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) are being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (incremented). The value of the radio wave counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) ), A radio wave irradiation gossip command that is classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave got is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is input when not in the big hit gaming state (big prize opening) For example, when a game ball enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command that is classified into an alarm display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control when the latch signal is input Obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (the jackpot It is determined whether or not a game state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”)), and the counter value for updating the design random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (determined the hit type) whether or not any of the hit type determination values matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. If it is based on the above, a variety of commands related to special figure 2 tuning effects are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a big hit gaming state is entered, various commands classified as jackpot related (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 closing display command, a large winning combination, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 The lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp is turned on so that the round indicator lamp is lit. The power is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp is turned on to light the 15 round display lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on or off the occurrence of a short time in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol per-determination random number described above is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning opening winning information. The data is stored in the normal winning slot winning information storage area of the RAM.

  In the normal winning award winning prize information storage area, the 0th section to the third section (four sections) are provided, and the normal winning opening is in order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. The winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening information storage, it is normal when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port. The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  Information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning slot winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning award winning prize information is set, the normal winning award winning prize information stored in the first winning prize winning information storage in the first winning prize winning information storage in the first winning prize winning information storage is stored in the second winning section of the ordinary winning prize winning prize information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, and the ordinary winning opening prize information in the third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage is in the second section of the normal winning opening prize information storage, respectively. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is shifted to become an empty area. For example, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal winning slot winning information storage, the normal winning slot winning information in the first winning section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning prize. In the 0th section of the mouth winning information storage, the ordinary winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning mouth winning information storage, respectively. The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening prize information storage are vacant areas. Here, when the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning slot winning information is set as the holding ball and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 Based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal holding indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the holding indicator is turned on, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Following the normal winning award winning process, the normal winning award winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol is extracted from the read out the normal winning award winning information and main control is performed. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that a gaming state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol taken out matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect production are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece. When the random number for determination per symbol does not match the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. , Create various commands that are classified as related to the usual figure synchronization production, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as output information To remember. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of normal winning) is ½.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the winning prize opening 2005 or a starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes a movable piece. 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, and classified as related to the jackpot. Various commands to be executed (for example, a winning prize 1 count display command corresponding to a winning prize count command based on a detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403 when a game ball having entered the winning prize opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric character effects, various commands categorized as notification displays, various types categorized as status displays Commands, various commands classified as test-related, and other various commands classified as other (for example, the main control board 1310 is attached to the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls entered in the various winning openings, the main prize ball number information output signal is used as the main prize ball number information. The main prize ball number information output command for instructing transmission to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 is stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are configured as main peripheral serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as DC +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial manager and complete transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, this is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In order to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, as the main peripheral serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in accordance with the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine is output to the peripheral control board 1510. Be able to. In other words, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 137 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. In the setting of the work area, a power-on state command classified as power-on in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, configure the power-on status command as the main peripheral serial data. Send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value constituting the main control return destination command at power-on, Subsequently, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command upon power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the process shown in FIG. 138, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed, the power-on state command classified as the power-on. When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As peripheral serial data, configure the power-on status command, send it to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure the power-on main control return destination command, Status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process, followed by the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command when the power is turned on. Status, mode, and sum value In order, it transmits to the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[11. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 140. FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[11-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIGS. 140 to 142 under the control of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is used to set the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs the wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch and determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. The RAM clear switch is determined not to be operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (that is, a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU does not operate the RAM clear switch, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination at step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete the payout information (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process described later (at power-off). (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning voltage as described above. Is done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination at step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that no power failure warning signal is input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  In the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. It is determined whether or not it has been.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in the determination in step S542, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. The number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal. In or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The prize ball number information output determination counter is provided by the payout motor 584. The number of game balls that have been paid out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later. Is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the payout.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process in step S550 described later, and the stored value is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, an award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, Reads the BRDY signal and CR connection signal, and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later have been normally received, and inputs them as input information. Store in the information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, a ball bite determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball bite state caused by the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are repeatedly paid out. At this time, time management of the judgment condition and the mismatch counter reset judgment time set is performed. For example, when the ball scratch determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball scratch determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gummy judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, the payout control MPU performs a momentary power failure or power failure. Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery By restoring the values to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery. With wear, so that it can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of various signal exchanges between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball play operation determination setting process, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, pay a rental ball as an error status output setting to the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thereby, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before an instantaneous stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible. When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is informed that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 The number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above based on the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, and the full tank and the ball shortage check process from the full tank detection sensor 154. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is full is stored in the state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information that indicates that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, the above-described ball breakage determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the ball breakage determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball breakage determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball breakage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball break is transmitted to indicate that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number. The ball breakage information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball play are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, the above-described ball break information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball break information Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays based on the various information are created. To the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball break information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number based on the ball break information, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, and this power failure warning If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S554, the timer update process is performed. In step S556, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed, a command reception process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, a main operation setting process is performed in step S562, and an LED is displayed in step S564. Display data creation processing is performed, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the process of the payout control MPU varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has received a power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process when power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[11-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 143 (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[12. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 136 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 146 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 147 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  In the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[12-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 144 under the control of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs). Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC becomes a state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, a command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from a built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current control information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is inputted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

  In step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, first, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady process flag SP-FLG. Value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a rendering operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, and a press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382, the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information obtained by operating the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and the press operation) Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC to which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set). Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 parts 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is set according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the presentation proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, based on a lamp pallet setting table composed of a specified brightness value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light; Set each. While the production is in progress, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one luminance designation value ranging from the luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the maximum luminance, is set, the above-described floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to become the set luminance designation value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the brightness designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the specified brightness value, one specified brightness value can be set in a 32-step range from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st specified brightness value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the 31st luminance that becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. One luminance designation value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the clockwise direction, and the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance (lights off). When the first luminance designated value is set to the next highest luminance level after the value, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance designated value toward the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light change along the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), while the rotation operation unit 302 is turned off. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness when rotating clockwise, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness) toward the first brightness specified value (for example, Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a staff member of a game hall clerk, etc.) can set the brightness during the production is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or a game hall clerk) Etc.) can be set to a desired luminance by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the effect, the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance are obtained. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) as an image. It can be done. In the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

  The normal palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of the 17 levels is selected in steps of 5% from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is a designated value. , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the luminance designated value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designated value that is the luminance designated value described above. Of the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value, the value corresponds to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In this embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance as the normal pallet value for various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Among various decorative boards that are set as the above-described gradation information and are provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light, a palette for a specific decorative board (LED that feels dazzling to the player) (not shown) A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  In the special palette value, the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the gradation information described above. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32-level ranges from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which are the luminance specified values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance (lights off) is obtained. The lowest possible brightness is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While being set along the normal palette value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) rotates the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set in accordance with a special palette value corresponding to the luminance designation value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, as direct light, The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value at which the minimum brightness (lights off) is set), and this is linked. Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance is turned off). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  Moreover, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of production is set, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can exert a more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance. Even if one luminance designation value is set over the luminance designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance designation value is set for a specific decorative board. For other decorative boards, one specified brightness value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set, so the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark) The luminance adjustment can be performed very easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although indirect light from the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the brightness compared to direct light, the special pallet value that is different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) for LEDs used as indirect light. Thus, the brightness can be set. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually managed by the palette value, so that the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of an LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen generated by the VDP of the peripheral control IC that reads image data from the SDRAM and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process described later. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. Yes. This can prevent a delay in processing time, but a so-called frame drop occurs. However, a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a main body frame by sound data output processing described later. This is a mechanism that can give priority to effects produced by various sounds such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as “various speakers”) with effects such as music and sound effects according to various effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the head screen data to the VDP of the peripheral control IC is indicated. The pointer is updated.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the head light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, the sound command data instructing the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, The pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even when other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process to be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to holding prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis process, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extract) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. The player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value described above. When one luminance designation value up to the 31st luminance designation value is set, the above-described gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set luminance designation value. It can be done.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC allows the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process to be, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, a normal symbol A variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with a variation display of a normal symbol storage command and a special symbol for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4) It is analyzed whether a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is received at the large winning opening 2005. Recognize whether it is a state.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. The various commands include various commands classified as related to Special Figure 1 tuned effects, various commands classified as related to Special Figure 2 tuned effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized in relation to figure production effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display, various commands categorized in status display, various commands categorized in test relation, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Thereby, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1511, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the peripheral control IC. , And a track number for instructing which track is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning processing, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, hour / minute / second which is time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is converted into the peripheral control ROM. Is read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC, when screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, Read (extract) from the peripheral control ROM and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotation position of the sound volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The values are converted to 1024 levels up to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 to control the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4. Music and sound effects are flowing from. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the sound volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch. It is like that.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

  Specifically, for the production sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is rotated. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) Until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative pattern change display is started after the change pattern command is received, or 0.5 seconds elapses after the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit and after the decorative pattern confirmation display. The operation can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A certain period of time (in this example, surroundings) when the variable symbol display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) From the time when the control unit receives the variation pattern command until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative symbol variation display starts, or after the stop control command is received at the peripheral control unit after the decoration symbol confirmation display 0.5 By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the time until the second elapses), the resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process Is converted into seven levels of substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is further rotated by the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the production sound can be adjusted by setting the substrate volume by increasing or decreasing the substrate volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 or It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of sound channels in the sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, and serializes the amplified effect sound. Output as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined performance sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value, whereby the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side. The volume that flows from the top side speaker 464 and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is actually obtained at the top center on the door frame 3 side. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4, and serializes the amplified effect sound and outputs it as audio data to the notification sound. In contrast, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track used and the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track used are adjusted. The maximum volume that is not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the volume value is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center on the door frame 3 side. Amplification is performed up to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound flows from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound in order to notify a hall clerk of fraudulent acts on No. 1, the sub-volume value of a track in which a production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, The sound data of the incorporated track, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track where the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value where the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set to the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame 4 side. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 for sound, and outputs the audio data to the amplified effect sound and alarm sound and serialized. That is, in reality, only the maximum sound volume notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. At this time, since the production sound is muted, although the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the production sound is not described above. It progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far is subtracted from the substrate volume that has been adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch. The volume value is set again (when the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 at this time, Set to the volume value), the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame 4 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. So that the flow from mosquitoes 622.

  As described above, when the production sound flows from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine. When a notification sound flows in order to notify a hall clerk or the like of a fraudulent act on the machine 1, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although the silenced production sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. 462, when the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main body frame 4 no longer flow, the production sound starts to flow notification sound Rather than begin to flow again from the time, so that begins to flow again from where it started to alarm sound to flow proceeded according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from the mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a game hall clerk operates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of the malfunction or the player's fraud by the notification sound.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the content stored in the SDRAM is provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the regular processing backup area.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the steady process flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1008, and the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. , Step S1014,..., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[12-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 145 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  In the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this processing is continued. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -A value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit of FIG. In step S1008 in the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), a value of 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. V blank signal interrupt processing, and in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 144, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 to set the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[12-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 144 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. 146 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is calculated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activated in the routine of the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) ) Is driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby history information (for example, original signals) of detection signals from the various sensors. Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided in the game board 5 The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a rotation operation unit) 302 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 by operating the performance operation unit 301. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in FIG. 1 and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 144, various processes related to the effects in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to happen before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[12-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transfer the main peripheral serial data to one byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is received in the reception buffer, and when this acquisition is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 147 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1 byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, 1-byte information received from the serial I / O port reception buffer of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and generates noise. The environment is susceptible.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. Is determined, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), This routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 When it is determined that the sum calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated.

[12-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that a power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In step S1304, if 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and if a power failure warning signal is not input. When the determination is made, the routine is terminated as it is, while when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds has elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1304 that the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, has been started and the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed. This is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the steady process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1312 again after determining that the power failure notification signal is not input or following step S1314, and whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. Determine whether. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this manner, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU performs the WDT clear process in step S1314, and The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 144 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It does not take. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted because the WDT clear process is not executed. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. When the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[13. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 149, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 is on (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit”, 15R A process for controlling opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the big hit gaming state is executed. Also, when the mode suggests “2R big hit”, a process of controlling opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the big winning opening 2005, each set process of the time reduction flag and the time reduction number counter is executed. The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time is short-time state, and the 2R big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time of the suspension of the first special symbol during the time-short state has become a mode indicating “2R big hit”. Set when ending the state, when exiting the 15R big hit gaming state during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state. When the hour / short flag is the next big hit or the counter value of the hour / hour counter is “0”, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 160 described later or the second special symbol stop (not shown) is performed. Reset by processing.

  In addition, the hour / times counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the continuation of the time-short state is changed, and is controlled to the time-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state. In this case, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the number of times of the short state at that time is set. The time-count counter is counted down every time the special symbol fluctuation display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes “0”. In some cases, the counter is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 160 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) (returns the counter value to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S237), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S238), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process concerning the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S3 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S244, the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S241. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not the game is a big hit, if the big win is reached, the type of the big hit, otherwise the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S245), the process ends.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S242 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S243 to S245, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first reserved memory. And a command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reserved storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and setting the peripheral control board. 1510 is transmitted. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored (the value of the reserved number counter) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S262).

  Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the special symbol variation display based on the generated start winning is a big hit, if the big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of variable display according to the start winning is performed on the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed or the type of game effect to be executed. IC can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the first determination information indicated by the received prior determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the prior determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S233 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on the counter value, the second reserved memory number is the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “1” (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S3 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S254, the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S251. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S253 to S254, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second reserved memory. And a command (second hold number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reserved storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and setting the peripheral control board. 1510 is transmitted. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 1.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002 is set to “4”, while the game ball is input to the second start port 2004. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the fact that the player entered the ball is set to “1”. The second starting port 2002 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the short-time state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened compared to the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to “1”, the period during which the second special symbol variation display is not performed continues for a long time, or the period when the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time. Even if a game ball enters, it is suppressed that the player cannot have a chance to win a lottery.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S282)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283).
5. The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop mode. The first special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284).

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 137).

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first control symbol stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in the first storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  After that, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. When the two special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 156 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). In the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of the jackpot determination values that indicate that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot are different from the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has been won, and the first special random numbers match the loss determination values indicating that the 315 types of first special random numbers are the loss. Are associated (probability of hits; 1/319, probability of hits; 3/319). In this example, in the second special symbol process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, a big hit determination value indicating that one type of the second special random number has been won. A match determination that indicates that 144 types of second special random numbers that are different from the jackpot determination value coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won, and that 174 types of second special random numbers are the above-described losses. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the value (big hit probability: 319 / small hit probability; 144/319). In other words, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start winning to the first starting port 2002 is performed. This is in a state advantageous to the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 receives the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the (random number), if it is determined that it is a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined that a small hit is made (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined that the game is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is the short-time state, and when the gaming state is the non-short-time state, the non-time reduction is used. And a reach determination table in a state. In the reach determination table in the short-time state, the reach reaches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicates that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Each random number is associated.

  In addition, the reach determination table in the non-short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the short-time state reach, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-short-time state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is higher than that in the short-time state.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the reach reach table selected with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316) and determines that the reach is lost (step S317), the fluctuation occurs. A reach flag indicating reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S318).

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether the small hit flag is set (step S324).

  If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 156 (B). The type of jackpot is determined by the above, and the mode at the time of the variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. After the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the prize winning hole sensor 2403 detects that ten game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed 15 times. By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R big hit game state that allows the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) 15R big hit which controls to short state when it is finished if it doesn't become big hit before the fluctuation display is executed 77 times. After the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the prize winning opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is closed twice ( 2 rounds) By repeating, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state that can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and if the short time state is controlled before the start of the 2R big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state ends. If the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not displayed as a big hit until 77 times, the game will be terminated. If it is controlled in the short-time state, it is determined to be one of the two types of big hits of 2R big hits that are controlled to the normal state (non-time-saving state) after the big hit gaming state.

  In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are assigned when 15R jackpot is reached, and 192 judgment values are sorted when 2R jackpot is reached. In other words, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big hit is made with a probability of 4%, and a 2R big hit is made with a probability of 96%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 196 judgment values are assigned when 15R jackpot is reached, and four judgment values are sorted when 2R jackpot is reached. In other words, when a lottery result for a big win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, a 15R big hit is obtained with a probability of 98%, and a 2R big hit is given with a probability of 2%. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of being determined as 15R big hit is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. The game is executed when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning at the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning at the first starting port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the person.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process if the small hit flag is set (step S324) when the big hit flag is not set in step S131. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 156 (C), and when the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is stopped (A stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. An opening / closing pattern for closing the winning combination winning opening 2006 after opening it for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the game ball to be able to enter the winning combination winning opening 2006 (easy) to a small hit gaming state. It is difficult to accept the game balls to the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 by guiding all the game balls that have won the prize winning port 2006 to the first loser hole 2535 during the small hit game state. 1st small portion An opening / closing pattern that closes the accessory winning hole 2006 after opening it for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed nine times to control the game ball to enter the accessory winning hole 2006 (easy) to a small hit gaming state. The second V prize opening 2008 is obtained by guiding one game ball out of the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state to the third sorting device 2550 after the prize winning hole 2006 is closed. In the case where the game ball is received in the second V prize opening 2008, after the small winning game state is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or The opening / closing pattern that is closed when the game winning ball sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have won the game winning opening 2005 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), and the game ball enters the game winning port 2005. Control to possible (easy) 15R jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it must be a big hit before the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed 77 times. 2. Second small hits that control to a short state when finished. The game ball is controlled to a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the bonus game winning hole 2006 by executing an opening / closing pattern that is closed after opening the bonus game winning hole 2006 (for example, 80 ms) for a short time, One game ball out of the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state is guided to the first V prize opening 2007 after closing the prize winning hole 2006 so that the game ball is first. Based on the fact that it was accepted into the V winning opening 2007, after the small winning game state, after having opened the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or 10 winning game balls. The opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the game ball to be able to enter the big prize opening 2005 (easy) to the 15R big hit gaming state. After the end of the winning gaming state, if the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is displayed 77 times before the change display is executed, if it is not a big hit, it will be terminated when the third small hit is controlled. One big hit is determined from the three types of small hits.

  In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 199 judgment values are distributed when the second small hit is reached, and one determination value is distributed when the third small hit is reached. ing. That is, when a lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained as a small lot, the second small hit is obtained with a probability of 99.5%, and the third small hit is obtained with a probability of 0.5%. We do not win per unit. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 determination values are distributed when the first small hit is reached, and 130 determination values are distributed when the second small hit is reached. In the case of the third small hit, 50 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number is obtained as a small hit, the first small hit is obtained with a probability of 10%, the second small hit is obtained with a probability of 65%, and the probability is 25%. It becomes the third small hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared with the first symbol random number table compared with the first symbol random number, the prize winning opening 2006 was won. By guiding one game ball out of the game balls to the first V winning opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small hit that always becomes the 15R big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is increased. And when the second special symbol change display based on the start winning to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the change display of the first special symbol based on the start win to the first start opening 2002. It is in an advantageous state.

  Further, when the type of the small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the small hit is determined as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. . In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined. Is determined as the second small hit symbol, and when the third small hit symbol is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the off symbol (step S327). After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the above-described lottery result (a big hit type, a small hit, a reach out, or a out of the lottery result) as a process in step S328. Is set (step S328) so that a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. ). Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282) as the process of step S329, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 controls display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle Stop display in the order of the decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be synchronized and displayed in the same symbol, and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the small hit as the mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped when the small hit is specified from the received determination result notification command. When the symbol ("final battle") is determined and 2R jackpot is specified, the 2R jackpot symbol (left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same even symbols among the symbols "0" to "9") When the 15R jackpot is specified, the 15R jackpot symbol (the combination in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same odd symbols among the symbols “0” to “9”) is determined. In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose If it is determined to be a symbol, and it is determined that it is out of place, it is determined to be a symbol that does not have reach (a combination of at least the left, right, and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control to the time-short state until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed at most 77 times after the big hit game state. The time reduction state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the shift control. Specifically, after the big hit gaming state, control is made to the short-time state, and after that, when a predetermined number (for example, two times) of big hits occurs, the control is not made to the short-time state after completion of the predetermined number of big hit gaming states. The normal state (non-time-short state) may be controlled. In addition, even when the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than a predetermined number, the control may be performed in the non-time-short state during the big hit gaming state, and the time-short state control may be performed again after the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S341), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit according to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the reach fluctuation pattern table (not shown) When the selection is made (step S346) and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, when a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect) occurs, a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the loss Is selected (step S347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the variation pattern table selected from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined in step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time-count counter that sets the number of continuations of the time-short state is “0”. To do. If the counter value is not “0”, after the time-short counter is counted down (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-count counter is “0” (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction control is ended is set (step S354).

  If it is determined in the processing of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in step S353 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, Then, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (first special symbol, second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol fluctuation time information set to about 1 second in the time-short state, In a non-time-short state, a special symbol variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special symbol variation time information set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern selected at the time of the short-time state is shorter than the fluctuation pattern selected at the time of the non-time-short state so that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. The variable time information of the special symbol is set.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S371. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is set. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S381. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S384) and resets the time reduction flag (step S385) when the time reduction end flag is set (step S383). As a result, the time reduction control (control in the time reduction state) is terminated when the predetermined number of times (77 in this example) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed. (Control of normal state (non-time-short state)) is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started (step S387). The waiting time until the start (time for displaying that the big hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, processing for setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to the jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit number counter is decremented by one for each round execution in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the prescribed round number. And control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, until the big hit number counter becomes “0”, the big prize opening opening pre-processing (step S401) and the big prize opening open process (step S402) are repeatedly executed to win the big prize. When the round is finished in the mouth open process (step S402), the big hit number counter is decremented by 1 to become “0”, and then the process proceeds to the big winning opening open post process (step S403) to end the jackpot game. The control to be executed is executed.

  Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the big hit type (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process, a big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) corresponding to the type of big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) is set. It has become.

  Further, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, in the big winning hole opening post-processing (step S403) of the big hit control process (step S235A). The opening / closing control of the first grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or ten game balls are won in the first big prize opening 2005 It is reset when all the rounds that can be executed in the big hit game are finished) (opening and closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern that is closed twice or 15 times when it is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403). By resetting the big hit execution flag, the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 is set. The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the big hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the start of the small hit game (a time for displaying that the small hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of the small hit. In step S391, a small hitting start command (first small hitting start command, second small hitting start command, third small hitting according to the type of small hitting (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) Set the start command. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process, the small hit start command (first small hit, first small hit, second small hit, and third small hit) is selected. Hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit start command).

  Further, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is ended, specifically, the small hitting middle processing (step S411) of the small hitting control process (step S236A) described later. ) Ends opening / closing control of the prize winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern that is closed after opening the prize winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) twice or 9 times). It will be reset when When the small hitting execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the interval time is set in the interval timer until the next special symbol change display is started (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed). (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

  When the processing of step S386 to step S394 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value. (Step S395), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the big hit game state based on the fact that the display state when the variable display is stopped is the big hit symbol. Waiting until 1510 is performed or waiting until the next round is started Pre-opening processing for a special winning opening (step S401)
2. The first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the special symbol variation display stop mode is a big hit symbol, or the first round is started based on the start of the next round. Is controlled to open state, and the first prize opening sensor 2403 detects that ten game balls have been won after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or in the first big prize opening 2005. Processing during closing of the special winning opening that is closed when the game is closed (step S402)
3. The post-opening process for the big prize opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit gaming state is finished when all rounds are finished (step S403).

  The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Also, in the above-mentioned process for opening the big prize opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the first big prize opening 2005 to the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big prize winning is set. At the end of the round for controlling the mouth 2005 to the closed state, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a jackpot game effect according to the number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by a device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hitting control process (step S236A). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start process for executing the setting process for starting the small hit gaming state (step S410)
2. Small hit-medium processing for monitoring the entry and release time of game balls in the small hit game state (step S411)

  The small hitting process flag is operated to indicate that the small hitting start process (step S410) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, when the entry of a game ball to a specific area is detected in the small hit processing, the big hit execution flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state (15 rounds in this example) Set in the counter and finish the process As a result, the big hit gaming state is started following the small hit gaming state.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal from the normal prize opening sensor 2401 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed through the normal prize opening 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires a normal random number of normal symbols from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. The winning process is executed.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol random number (step S804).
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 is displayed so that the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the second start door 2411 is moved backward and the game ball to the second start port 2004 is retreated. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 137).

[14. Game in small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small hit game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the change display of the special symbol is a small hit, the small winning game that executes the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening the winning award winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) All the game balls detected by the prize winning port sensor 2513 after entering the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state are the first lose mouth sensor 2515, the third lose mouth sensor 3004, When the first V prize opening sensor 2514 and the second V prize opening sensor 3003 detect it, that is, when it is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 from the inside of the prize winning prize opening 2006, the small hit gaming state is changed. It is supposed to end. In addition, a game ball that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit gaming state is received by the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, and the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening. When detected by the sensor 3003, the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state, and the game ball that has entered the bonus winning hole 2006 during the small hit game state is displayed in the first loser hole 2535 or the third loser hole 2556. When it is received and detected by the first lose mouth sensor 2515 or the third lose mouth sensor 3004, it is controlled to a normal state or a short time state according to the control state before the small hit after the small hit gaming state.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, the first small hit for controlling the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 to be guided to the first loser opening 2535 and the game balls won in the bonus prize winning hole 2006. One of the game balls is controlled to be guided to the third sorting device 2550 and turns in the croon 2553, and then the second V winning port 2008 and the two third loser ports 2556 A second small hit which is controlled so as to be accepted, and a third small hit which is controlled so that one game ball among the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 , Any one of the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In addition, the number of opening / closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is smaller at the first small hit than at the second small hit and the third small hit, and all the game balls won in the bonus winning prize 2006 are used as the prize winning opening. Since the first lost mouth sensor 2515 is guided to the nearest first lost mouth 2535 from 2006 and is detected by the first lost mouth sensor 2515, the execution period of the small hit gaming state (the period from the start of the small hit gaming state to the end) is short. In the third small game, one of the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 is guided to the first V prize winning hole 2007 near the first loser hole 2535 from the prize winning hole 2006. Therefore, since the first V winning opening sensor 2514 detects it, the execution period of the small hit gaming state becomes short after the first small hit. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one game ball out of the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550 which is the farthest from the prize winning hole 2006, and the third pitch is played. After the game ball guided to the minute device 2550 is swung in the croon 2553, the game ball received in the second V winning port 2008 is detected by the second V winning port sensor 3003 or received in the third loser port 2556. Since the game ball is detected by the third lose mouth sensor 3004, the execution period of the small hit gaming state is the longest among the three types of small hits.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when it is determined that a small hit is made based on the first special random number in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state (non-short-time state). In the normal display (non-short-time state), the second small hit is executed in most cases in the normal state (non-short-time state). When a small hit is determined based on the second special random number, the rate of execution of the third small hit is higher than the normal state (non-time-short state), and once for four small hits in the short-time state The third small hit is executed at the rate of.

  That is, in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state (non-short-time state), if a game ball is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit game state, the game is called the short-time state after the 15R big hit game state. Since the transition control is performed to an advantageous state for the player, one of the game balls that have entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit game state is swung into the croon 2553 by turning the second game ball. While paying attention to whether it is accepted in the V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2556 for a certain period of time, in the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the short-time state, the small hit game state Even if a game ball is received at the 2nd V winning opening 2008, it is only controlled again after the 15R big hit gaming state, so that it enters the bonus winning hole 2006. Was one game ball of the game balls can lead to rather decrease in the gaming interest when pivoted within Kroon 2553. For this reason, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the short-time state, the ratio of the third small hits in the short hit game state execution period is increased so that the small hit game state is shortened during the short-time state. It is supposed to end in time.

  Further, as described above, when the sorting rotator 2531 rotates from the retractable state to the unaccommodable state in the third small hit, the game ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the allocating rotator 2531 is changed to the first athletic passage. 2536, the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 flows down, contacts the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters the first V prize opening 2007. . Therefore, in the third small hit, the game balls distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 by rotating the sorting rotator 2531 from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state are discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. As a result, the player cannot see. Further, the first V winning opening 2007 can be entered when the sorting door 2544 moves forward above the second loser opening 2543, but the sorting door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operating state. In other words, the presence of the sorting door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see), and the game balls distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 by the sorting door 2544 are quickly moved to the rear of the game board 5. Since it is difficult to recognize the existence of the first V winning opening 2007 together with the discharge to the first V winning opening 2007, in other words, the player is guided to the first V winning opening 2007. It is hard to notice that passes. Thus, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit is made in the short-time state, the lottery in the small hit game state ( The small hit gaming state is executed without being aware of whether or not the V winning opening (the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008) is accepted, and the small hit gaming state ends. The 15R big hit gaming state can be executed later. As a result, a small hit gaming state and a 15R big hit gaming state are continuously generated in a short time, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  Also, in the case where the game balls are distributed to the third sorter 2550 in the second small hit and the case where the game balls are distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 in the third small hit, the effect display device 1600 The effect of the small hit gaming state to be executed is different. Specifically, whether the game balls distributed to the third sorting device 2550 enter the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2556 when the second small hit is reached. While an effect such as a boost is executed, an effect that does not make the user aware of the rotation of the sorting rotating body 2531 when the third small hit is reached (for example, a big hit when the third small hit is reached) It is difficult for the player to realize that the small hit game state is executed by performing the same notification as in the case of becoming a big hit (notifying that it is a big hit instead of a small hit in the case of the third small hit) In addition, as a special bonus chance that can obtain a prize ball different from the prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit gaming state, the same opportunity as the small hit gaming state is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. May be executed. As a result, the player who recognizes that he has won the 15R jackpot will be able to win a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot game state and obtain a prize ball that is different from the 15R jackpot game state, thus improving the gaming interests. To do.

  If the time to reach the V winning opening is shorter in the third small hit than the second small hit, the path (in which the game ball guided by the second small hit is received in the V winning opening ( The length of the first route) and the route (second route) until the game ball guided at the third small spot is received by the V prize opening becomes longer in proportion to the arrival time to the V prize opening. Not limited to this, if the time to reach the V winning opening is longer than the third small hit, the path (first path) until the game ball guided at the second small winning opening is received by the V winning opening is the third small You may make it become shorter than the path | route (2nd path | route) until the game ball induced | guided | derived by winning is received in V winning opening. For example, by providing a decelerating means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball in the first path, the arrival time to the V prize opening may be longer than the game ball passing through the second path.

  In the above-described example, the first special symbol variable display executed in a normal state (non-short-time state) is provided with a plurality of V winning ports including the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008. In the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the short-time state, one game ball out of the game balls won in the prize winning port 2006 is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 having the second V winning port 2008. By guiding one game ball among the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 to the first V prize winning hole 2007 that is next to the first loser hole 2535, the distance from the prize winning hole 2006 is Although the execution period of the small hit game state is configured to be different, the distance to the V winning opening, the number of V winning openings, etc. are not limited to those described above. For example, a game having only one V winning opening. The technical idea of the present invention also in the machine It is applicable. Specifically, for example, means (obstacles, etc.) for inhibiting or delaying the acceptance of the game ball to the V prize opening, such as allowing the game ball to be accepted at the V prize opening after turning in the croon 2553, are provided. Therefore, there is no means for obstructing or delaying the reception of the game ball to the V winning opening and the second small hit having a long time to reach the V winning opening (the number provided is at least smaller than that of the second small winning opening). 3rd small hit with a short arrival time to the V prize opening, and a normal state (variation display of the first special symbol) and a short time state (depending on the arrival time to the common V winning opening) The execution ratio in the second special symbol variation display) may be changed.

[14-1. Error notification in small hit gaming state]
Next, error notification in the small hit gaming state will be described. In this example, in the small hit game state, the time until the game ball that has won the prize winning hole 2006 is discharged is monitored, and if it is not discharged even after a predetermined period, an error notification is performed.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting start process (step S411). In the small hit starting process, a setting process for starting the small hit gaming state is executed.

  When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421). When a time-out occurs (step S422), that is, when a standby time elapses after the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed until the small hit gaming state starts, the small hit gaming state starts. An initial value “0” is set in the elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time from the beginning (step S423).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects opening / closing pattern data according to the type of small hit being executed (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) (step S424), and the selection. Based on the opened / closed pattern data, the control of the prize winning opening 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process is shifted to the small hit / medium processing (step S411). When the small hit process flag is updated (step S426), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes.

  Note that the opening / closing pattern data is provided for each type of small hits, and indicates the operation mode of each of the accessory winning award 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state. Is. In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the winning combination prize opening 2006, the sorting rotary body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 based on the opening / closing pattern data corresponding to the small hit type selected in step S424. Thus, the prize winning opening 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 are operated in the manner shown in FIG.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the middle hit process (step S412).

  When the small hitting process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to an elapsed timer for measuring an elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state, and a discharge monitoring timer to be described later is set. Then, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens and closes the open / close pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state) among the open / close pattern data selected in step S424 of the small hit start process. The data is read out, and the opening / closing pattern of the prize winning port 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 is controlled based on the read opening / closing pattern data (step S432).

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is turned on if the prize winning port sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball received in the prize winning hole 2006 is turned on (step S433), that is, the game at the prize winning prize port 2006 is played. If the ball has been accepted, 1 is added to the remaining ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been discharged from the prize winning port 2006 out of the game balls that have won the prize winning port 2006 (step S434).

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured such that when the game ball is first received in the winning combination winning opening 2006 after the small hit game state is started (when the first game ball enters). (Step S435), an assumed longest period provided corresponding to each of the small hit types as the longest period assumed until all the game balls that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 including this game ball are discharged The discharge monitoring timer is set (step S436).

  In this example, in the case of the first small hit, all the game balls received in the winning prize winning opening 2006 enter the second loser opening 2535 without being distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531. Therefore, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10,000 ms). In the case of the second small hit, one game ball out of the game balls received in the winning prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, and the first attrie passage 2536 is set. Since the game ball that has passed through and entered the third sorting apparatus 2550 turns in the croon 2553 and then enters one of the second V winning port 2008 and the two third loser ports 2556, there are three possible longest possible periods. Is set to the longest period (for example, 180,000 ms). In the case of the third small hit, although one game ball out of the game balls received in the prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first athletic passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, the first athletic passage 2536 is used. In order to accept the game ball that has passed through the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the shortest period after the first small hit is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 60000 s).

  The discharge monitoring timer is subtracted in the above step S431, and the inconsistency state between the number of game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006 and the number of game balls discharged from the prize winning hole 2006 remains after the timeout of the discharge monitoring timer. In the case of continuing, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has been performed.

  In addition, if the elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state is monitored and this elapsed time reaches the assumed maximum period according to the type of the small hit being executed, if any abnormality (error) or cheating is performed The elapsed time from the first opening timing of the accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the small hit gaming state may be monitored, and this elapsed time may be an estimated longest period according to the small hit type being executed. In this case, it may be determined that some abnormality (error) or dishonest act is being performed, or the timing at which the game balls are actually sorted by the sorting rotator 2531 (small in the first small hit) From the state in which the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) with the start of the hit gaming state and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 faces upward, the first distribution solenoid 2 32 is in an OFF (non-energized) state so that the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 operates so as to face right (first sorting operation timing of the sorting rotator 2531), second small hit Then, after the first sorting operation timing of the sorting rotator 2531, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) again, and the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 is directed upward from the first state. The timing at which the sorting solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) and the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 operates so as to face right (the second allocating operation timing of the sorting rotator 2531), In the third small hit, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is again turned on (energized) after the second sorting operation timing of the sorting rotating body 2531. The first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) from the state in which the housing portion 2531a of the minute rotating body 2531 is facing upward, and the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531 is operated to the right. When the elapsed time from the timing (the third sorting operation timing of the sorting rotator 2531) is monitored and this elapsed time reaches the assumed maximum period according to the small hit type being executed, an error (error) ) Or fraudulent acts may be determined.

  In addition, when the discharge of the game ball received at the winning prize winning opening 2006 is detected, that is, when the gaming ball received at the winning prize winning opening 2006 is discharged, the first lose mouth sensor 2515 and the first V winning prize are detected. When a game ball is detected in any of the mouth sensor 2514, the second V winning mouth sensor 3003, and the third lose mouth sensor 3004 (step S437), the residual ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438).

  Then, whether or not the residual ball counter is “0”, that is, whether or not the number of game balls received in the prize winning hole 2006 matches the number of game balls discharged from the prize winning hole 2006. (Step S439), and if the remaining number counter is “0”, it is determined that no abnormality or fraud has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S442.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether or not an abnormality or an illegal act has occurred (step S440). . As described above, the discharge monitoring timer is provided corresponding to each of the small hit types as the longest period assumed from the start of the small hit gaming state until all the game balls are discharged from the prize winning hole 2006. This indicates the remaining period of the assumed maximum period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114) of the main control side timer interruption process are executed again, the small ball hitting process is executed and the residual ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. It becomes like this.

  Further, if the residual ball counter is not “0” and the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440, it is determined that an abnormality or fraud has occurred and a discharge error is notified (step S441). The hit processing is terminated. For the discharge error notification, error display on the effect display device 1600, output of notification sound by the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., lighting in a predetermined manner by lamps / LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, etc. In this example, a display such as “abnormal discharge” is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600, and the outputs of the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 are not performed. In other words, the state in which the remaining ball counter is not “0” indicates a minor abnormality such that most of the gaming balls that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 are not discharged, and therefore an abnormality of the gaming machine is notified. Is displayed so as not to make the player uncomfortable or uneasy. After notifying the discharge error in step S441, the small hit process is terminated without updating the small hit process flag, so that the special control and special electric accessory control process of the main control side timer interrupt process (step When S114) is executed, the small hitting process is executed again. That is, all of the game balls received in the winning prize winning opening 2006 are discharged, or the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU is completely erased by operating the RAM clear switch by the game store clerk. Until the game is completed (until reset), the discharge error notification is executed without ending the small hit gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is “0”, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 (step S442). If the game ball has not entered the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball has entered the first loser port 2535 or the third loser port 2556, and the first loser port sensor. If detected by 2515 or the third lose mouth sensor 3004, a small hit end command for instructing execution of the effect at the end of the small hit gaming state is set (step S443), and the small hit start process (step S411) is set. When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process is shifted (step S447), this process is terminated.

  If a game ball enters the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 3003, until the big hit game starts. Is set in the interval timer (step S444), then the small hitting execution flag is reset and the big hitting execution flag is set (step S445). In addition, a V winning jackpot start command for instructing execution of an effect at the start of the big hit gaming state based on the reception of the game ball at the first V winning prize opening 2007 and the second V winning prize opening 2008 is set (step S446). When the small hitting process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the start process (step S411) (step S447), the process ends.

  In this way, in this example, when a game ball is received at the prize winning port 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is incremented by one. By subtracting, the number of game balls remaining without being ejected from the prize winning device 2006 can be grasped. In addition, the period until the discharge error notification is executed (estimated longest period) differs according to the small hit type, in other words, according to the game ball allocation destination, In the third small hit accepted at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the minute device 2550, the discharge error is larger than the second small hit that makes the game ball enter the third sorting device 2550 and turns in the croon 2553. The period until the notification is executed (assumed maximum period) is shortened. That is, the time until the discharge error notification is executed is shortened for the small hit with a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning opening.

  Since the game ball usually does not remain in the prize winning port 2006, any abnormality (error) occurs when the game ball remains in the bonus prize 2006 for a long period of time. Can be determined. In addition, when it is detected that more game balls are discharged than the number of game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006, an illegal act is performed in which a game ball is illegally won in the prize winning hole 2006. It can be determined that there is a possibility. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent activities is monitored, and when there is a suspicion, a discharge error is notified.

  Further, in this example, it is detected by detecting that game balls remain in the prize winning hole 2006 or that a larger number of game balls are discharged than the game balls won in the prize winning hole 2006. Even if a discharge error notification is issued based on the time out of the discharge monitoring timer when the ball counter is not “0”, a small hit process is performed each time the main control timer interrupt process is executed without stopping the game. Is executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter. If the value of the residual ball counter is “0”, that is, if the normal ball returns to the normal state, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning prize are received. The game system automatically returns to the state in which the entry of the game ball into the mouth 2008 is determined and ends the small hit game state.

  In this example, even if the residual ball counter value is not “0” after executing the discharge error notification in step S441 of the small hitting process, if a more serious abnormality occurs, The error notification regarding this serious abnormality is executed with priority. As a serious abnormality, for example, when any of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), or when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification) ), When it is detected that the door frame 3 is opened (door opening error notification), there is a high possibility that an illegal act is performed. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is terminated, and error notification (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification) related to these serious abnormalities is completed. Etc.), and after the error notification related to the serious abnormality is completed, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state may be resumed, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality is notified to the small hit gaming state. By overwriting the discharge error notification in step S441 in step S441, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the output from the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., the game board 5 and the lighting / flashing of lamps / LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (visual (Although it is executed in a viewable manner) (while running behind the scenes), the content of the discharge error notification progresses over time even while an error notification related to a serious abnormality is being performed, When the related error notification is completed, the display on the effect display device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., the game board 5 and the door frame so that the discharge error notification is visually recognized and viewed with the progressed contents. 3 may be reflected in the lighting / flashing of the lamps / LEDs etc. (for example, an error notification related to a serious abnormality is issued five seconds after the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is started). When this error notification is executed for 30 seconds after the start, step S441 in the small hit gaming state after the error notification related to a serious abnormality is finished. To resume from the contents of the 35 seconds after the start of the discharge error notification).

  Further, the discharge error notification mode may be different depending on whether the remaining ball counter is “1” or more and less than “0” in step S439 of the small hitting process. When the remaining ball counter is “1” or more, the game ball that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is only a slight abnormality that is not discharged, while the remaining ball counter is less than “0”. Indicates a serious abnormality in which more than the number of game balls entered into the prize winning hole 2006 is discharged, and there is a possibility that the game ball is illegally entered into the prize winning hole 2006. There is. For this reason, when a minor abnormality occurs in which the game ball that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is not discharged, a discharge error notification 1 is displayed in a region of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. ”Is displayed, and the production sound is continuously output from the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, and no error sound is output, and a part of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 is partially When a serious abnormality occurs in which more than the number of game balls that have entered the game ball is discharged, a discharge error notification 2 is displayed, for example, “illegal occurrence!” In addition to displaying, the loudspeaker 622, 354, 462, 464 suppresses the volume of the production sound, and an error sound “Injustice is being performed” is loud. And force may be notified of the occurrence of fraud by causing further light emission across the door frame 3 by emit all of the LED provided on the door frame 3.

  Further, in this example, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 performs the second distribution in the second small hit gaming state. When the game ball guided to the third distribution guiding path 2551 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guiding path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays the effect display device 1610 and the speaker 622. 354, 462, 464, the lamps / LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, etc., and the game balls turning around the croon 2553 in the third sorter 2550 are the second V prize opening 2008 and the third An effect is provided for enlarging which one of the two is acceptable.

  The detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 Whether or not an abnormality has occurred may be determined in accordance with the detection of the game ball by. For example, when a game ball is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or a losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type in the above small hit processing, or according to the small hit type When there is a possibility of detecting a game ball at a V winning opening or a loser opening that is different from the V winning opening or the lost opening that has been set, When the game ball faces the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and a distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small hitting process.

  Specifically, as a V winning opening or a loss opening scheduled according to the small hit type, the first lose opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small hit, and the second winning hole in the case of the second small hit. The V winning opening 2008 or the third loser opening 2556 is scheduled, and the first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled in the case of the third small hit. In the case of the first small hit, if it is detected that the game ball is received in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loser opening 2556 in the small hit middle processing, In the case of two small hits, if it is detected that a game ball has been received in one of the first loser opening 2535 and the first V winning opening 2007 in the small hit middle process, If it is detected that a game ball has been received in any of the first loser opening 2535, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loser opening 2556, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, for example, as shown in FIG. In this way, display of “illegal occurrence!” Etc. is displayed in the entire area of the production display device 1600, and the volume of the production sound is suppressed from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 as “error has been performed. ” In output, it may be executed a sorting error notification to notify the occurrence of fraud by causing further light emission across the door frame 3 by emit all of the LED provided on the door frame 3. In this case, the occurrence of fraud can be notified immediately, and the fraud can be detected early.

  In addition, a second distribution detection sensor for detecting a game ball circulating in the second distribution guide path 2541 is provided in the middle of the second distribution guide path 2541, and a detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor is received. The game may be input to the main control board 1310. In the case of the first small hit, the game ball is placed in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loser opening 2556 in the middle hit process. In the case where it is determined that the game ball has entered the second distribution guide path 2541 because the second distribution detection sensor has detected the game ball, Although the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hitting process, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 cannot detect the game ball, so that the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is the first. It is determined that you are heading to the V prize opening 2007 In the case of the third small hit, the second distribution guide path 2541 is detected by detecting the game ball by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit middle processing. When it is determined that the game ball passing through the inside is directed to the third sorting device 2550, it is possible to detect the game ball at a V winning opening or a lost opening different from the scheduled V winning opening or a lost opening. If the error occurs, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the sorting error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a state in which an illegal act is likely to occur and to detect the illegal act at an early stage.

  Note that the distribution error notification mode may be varied depending on the degree of abnormality (injustice level). For example, in the case of the first small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects a game ball and the game When it is determined that the ball has entered the second distribution guide path 2541, or in the case of the second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit middle processing, but the third distribution detection sensor When it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007 because the game ball cannot be detected at 2552, the degree of abnormality is determined to be high. Indication of "illegal occurrence!" Etc. is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and fraudulent acts are generated by outputting "Illegal fraud" from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 at a large volume. To inform By detecting the game ball by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball in the small hit processing in the case of small hit and in the case of the third small hit in the small hit processing If it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low and, for example, a partial area of the effect display device 1600 May be notified of the occurrence of an abnormality different from the fraudulent act by not displaying the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464. That is, when the game ball passes through the path for the game ball to enter the V prize opening at a rate higher than the preset percentage of the game ball entering the V prize opening according to the type of small hit (executed) If the V winning expectation is higher than the V winning expectation set in advance according to the small hit type being determined), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high and fraud is being performed. When the game ball passes through the path for the game ball to enter the V winning opening at a rate lower than the pre-set ratio of the game ball entering the V winning opening according to the small hit type (execution) If the V winning expectation level is lower than the V winning expectation level set in advance according to the type of small hits being made), it is judged that the degree of abnormality is low, and an abnormality that is different from fraud May be notified. In addition, when the V winning expectation is lower than the V winning expectation preset in accordance with the type of small hit being executed, the player himself suffers a disadvantage, but there is damage to the game store side. Since it does not occur, the distribution error notification may not be performed when the degree of such abnormality is low.

  In addition, a game ball is detected at a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or the losing opening scheduled according to the small hit type, or the V winning opening scheduled according to the small hit type. During the period when the distribution error notification is made based on the possibility that a game ball can be detected at a V winning opening or a lost opening different from the game winning opening, the above-mentioned small hitting / medium processing is performed to the accessory winning opening 2006. Even if it is determined that a minor abnormality that the game ball that has entered has not been discharged has occurred, the game ball is played at a V winning opening or a lost opening that is different from the V winning opening or the lost opening that is scheduled according to the small hit type. It is executed based on the fact that it has been detected and there is a possibility that a game ball may be detected at a V winning opening or a lost opening different from a V winning opening or a lost opening scheduled according to the small hit type. The distribution error notification continues without being terminated. It is executed. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the fact that it has been determined that a minor abnormality has occurred that the game ball that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 in the small hit processing has not been discharged is a state where it can be viewed and viewed. Although not executed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the contents of the discharge error notification 1 are advanced with the passage of time. Further, in this case, when the game ball that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is discharged and the value of the remaining ball counter becomes “0”, there is a minor abnormality that the game ball that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 has not been discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that it has occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period of error notification (in this example, a distribution error notification) based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, an error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality ( In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed so as to be visible / viewable. However, it is executed quietly behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (in this example, the distribution error notification), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

  In this example, even in the state where the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state has not occurred, the accessory winning prize sensor 2513, the first V winning prize sensor 2514, the first lose mouth sensor 2515, the second V winning prize sensor 3003, The detection of the game ball by the third losing mouth sensor 3004 is monitored, and when the game ball is detected by any of these, it is determined that the cheating is being performed and the occurrence of the cheating is notified. It has become. In addition, in the state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, the detection of the game ball by the second distribution detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552 may be monitored. When a game ball is detected by either the detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, that is, that an illegal act is performed, and the occurrence of the illegal action is notified. Good. That is, in the state where the small hit game state or the big hit game state has not occurred, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the game ball entering the V winning port, the game ball passes through any passage in the accessory winning port 2006 It may be determined that fraudulent activity is being performed even if the user has passed, and the occurrence of the illegal activity may be notified.

  In the above example, when a discharge error notification is executed in step S441, or a game ball is detected at a V winning opening or a lost opening different from the V winning opening or the lost opening scheduled according to the small hit type. Or when a distribution error notification is made based on the possibility that a game ball may be detected at a V winning opening or a lost opening different from the V winning opening or the lost opening scheduled according to the small hit type In addition, the small ball hitting process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter. However, the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the residual ball counter. Even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the residual ball counter value is monitored, and when the residual ball counter value becomes normal (“0”), the game automatically returns from the abnormal state to make a small hit. The gaming state may not be terminated. As a result, the occurrence of an abnormality can be reliably grasped.

  In addition, after a distribution error notification, when a game ball is detected at a V winning opening or a loser opening (regular receiving entrance) that is scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type When a game ball rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third sort detection sensor 2552 is detected in the case of the second small hit), the sort error notification is terminated. You may make it do. In addition, after a discharge error notification, when a game ball is detected at a V winning opening or a loser opening (regular receiving entrance) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type When the game ball rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the third sort detection sensor 2552 is detected in the case of the second small hit), the discharge error notification is terminated. Also good. In addition, the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the discharge error notification to be executed is detected for a game ball that rolls on a route (regular route) scheduled according to the type of small hit (for example, the second small hit In this case, it may be reset every time the third distribution detection sensor 2552 is detected. In this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is being executed. What is necessary is just to enable discharge error notification when the assumed maximum period according to the small hit type is reached.

[15-1. Volume control]
The volume adjustment switch is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first A fixed period (in this example, the variation pattern at the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) on the one special symbol indicator, the second special symbol indicator) From the time the command is received until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, or from the time the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed after the decorative symbol is confirmed. Except for the volume of effect sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4. An integer switch so that the can be adjusted by rotating operation. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjustment switch is changed by being rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is a resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. Music from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame frame speaker 622 for the main frame 4 is controlled by controlling the sound source IC so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6. And sound effects. As described above, music, sound effects, etc. are generated from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. The directing sound is played.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to performance sounds such as music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk or the like of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 In addition, the contents related to the game effect are notified (for example, the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is more likely to be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the switch. The volume from the mute to the maximum volume is controlled by the peripheral control IC by a program. So that the can be.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed from mute to maximum volume in five steps, unlike the substrate volume divided into seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame 4 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the bass frame speaker 622 for low sounds is reduced, the volume is increased when the pachinko machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is cheating. In the embodiment, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special period. A fixed period of time (in this example, peripheral control) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative symbol is displayed, or 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition to adjusting the volume of the music and sound effects by turning the volume adjustment switch (except until the elapsed time) Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in the period until the end control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A fixed period when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started or stopped (in this example, 0.5 mm after the variable pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol variable display is started). Until 0.5 seconds elapses or 0.5 seconds elapses after the display of the decorative symbol is received after the stop control command is received by the peripheral control unit), and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the changing effect. And the operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect) ) Or the like, except, thereby making it possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound music and sound effects by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pushing operation section 303 of the staging operation unit 300. Specifically, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first A fixed period when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in the special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (in this example, the variation pattern command in the peripheral control unit) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the display of the decorative symbol change, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the stop display command is received at the peripheral control unit and after the final display of the decorative symbol). Operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variation effect (the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect). When the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated except for an effective period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is accepted, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the effect operation. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the unit 300, the volume of the effect sound such as music and sound effects can be changed and adjusted to a desired volume (any one from the minimum volume 1 to the maximum volume 5). .

  Specifically, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is 1 When the volume is changed to a stepped level, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, The volume is changed to a volume lowered by one level.

  FIG. 167 shows a bass sound for the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame 4 according to the rotation operation of the volume control switch and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300. In the state where the volume of the effect sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 is set to the volume 5, the effect display device 1600 starts the change effect to display the decorative design in a variable manner. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram illustrating an example of a case where the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed and a case where the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is subsequently rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 167, without changing the volume of the effect sound from the volume 5 to the volume 4 in the middle of the changing effect executed by the effect display device 1600, without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from the volume 5 to the volume 4, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4. That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the rotation operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 The volume after this change is reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464 and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4 at the timing t1 when the rotary operation 302 is performed. It has become.

  Further, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes its scale according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. As a result, the current set volume can be discriminated visually. In this example, an indicator that is displayed in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in which an effect effect by a decorative symbol or the like is executed. In addition, this indicator is displayed on the outermost surface among images displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, an indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed semi-transparently so that an image such as a fluctuating effect executed on the back portion can be recognized. It should be noted that a sub display device different from the effect display device 1600 in which the fluctuating effect by the decorative design or the like is executed may be provided. In this case, according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 The indicator may be displayed on the sub display device. Further, in this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses from the end of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, after the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation unit 302 being rotated, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You may make it make it. The indicator described above may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or a lower right display area that does not overlap with the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is partitioned and this right An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on the display device.

  Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the effect sound such as music or sound effect are changed by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as “beep”) corresponding to the changed sound volume is changed. Electronic sound) is output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4. As a result, when the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, the effect sound of music and sound effects is generated by the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body for the bass of the main body frame 4. Even if the sound is not output from the frame speaker 622, the actual sound volume is determined by the specific sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4. You can adjust the volume while checking. Note that the specific sound may not be output during execution of the variation effect. That is, during the execution of the variation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variation effect is output, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the specific sound unrelated to the content of the variation effect is output during the variation effect, thereby inhibiting the variation effect being executed.

  This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the effect sound However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the volume adjustment switch is directly rotated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect, and the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is adjusted. Adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume control switch according to the operation. There are two ways to do this. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, only the hall clerk can turn the volume adjustment switch. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the production sound of music and sound effects, or it may be loud for the player to feel the music and sound effect production sounds. is there. Therefore, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the effect sound such as music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. It is like that. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of music and sound effect to a desired volume, so that the volume of the sound adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the effect sound of music and sound effect. Can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300, and feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk to produce a production sound of music and sound effects. When it feels noisy, it can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time and is waiting for a customer, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), The volume adjusted by the player who is sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the effect sound of music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the front of the pachinko machine 1 A player who sits on the game and operates the game can operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level, or sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time. When a player who has played a game feels the volume adjusted to be loud and feels noisy music or sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated to reduce the sound volume to a desired level.

[15-2. Adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added to or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, In addition to adjusting the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, the sound output in a high sound range (a predetermined frequency band or higher) can be suppressed (mute may be performed).

  That is, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first special symbol). For a certain period of time when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the display unit or the second special symbol display unit (in this example, the variation control command is received by the peripheral control unit) Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the decorative symbol display, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit) The operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in (the so-called button effect, the rotation operation unit 302 and the push operation unit 300 of the effect operation unit 300 When the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is pressed except for the effective period for receiving the operation of the operation unit 303, etc., various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether high sound is output, light emission of the LED of the door frame 3) A screen for performing an environment change mode for setting the presence / absence or the like) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, a list of the environments that can be changed (whether high sound is output, whether the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is displayed in a list, and any of them can be displayed on the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where such an environment setting is selected, a process for changing the environment setting can be executed. In this way, by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, sound output in a specific frequency band can be suppressed, the volume adjustment switch can be rotated, The output can be performed at a volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. Further, the screen in the environment change mode is displayed on the outermost surface among the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, but is displayed translucently so that the back image can be recognized.

  Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. And the state which suppresses the sound output of a specific frequency band by operating the rotation operation part 302 and pressing the pressing operation part 303 in the state which has selected the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and a specific frequency band A screen to select the state that does not suppress the sound output is displayed (for example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed, and “high-frequency cut-off” or “high-frequency cut-off” is displayed in the mini-character balloon, and rotation operation is performed. The display is switched every time the unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount of rotation), the state where the rotation operation unit 302 is operated again to suppress the sound output in the specific frequency band, and the state where the sound output in the specific frequency band is not suppressed With one of these selected, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to change the selected state, and a determination screen is displayed (a volume setting mini-camera). Balloon within the displays either "You there cut of the high-frequency range," or "I no cut of the high range" of). Thereafter, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 s) elapses, the environment change mode is ended by erasing the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, after the determination screen is displayed, the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be erased based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or an effect image or the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A lower left display area that does not overlap with the display of the indicator when adjusting the sound volume may be partitioned, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen may be displayed in the lower left display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and a screen, a selection screen, and a determination screen for performing the environment change mode are displayed on this display device. May be.

  In addition, after the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the rotation operation is performed. Even if the unit 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is invalid, and the indicator is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the environment change mode ends, the effect sound volume adjustment is enabled and an indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Will come to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 167, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is changed in the middle of the fluctuating effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the volume control switch is rotated or the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to suppress the volume that is set according to the operation, the rotation operation of the production operation unit 300 is performed at the timing t2 when these operations are completed. Changes according to the operation of the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame speaker 622 for the main frame 4. . Then, the decoration symbol is fixedly stopped based on the timing of t3 when the variation effect executed by the effect display device 1600 ends (the stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decoration symbol is received from the main control MPU). The change according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 performed in the middle of the change effect at the timing is reflected, that is, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. And the volume set in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

  It should be noted that the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is invalid after the timing t2 when the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed in the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the variation effect. The Then, when the change in the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing t3 when the change effect ends, The volume control of the effect sound in the frequency band is effective. Further, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is invalid, it is an environment where the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. A screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but volume adjustment in a specific frequency band cannot be selected. It should be noted that the environment change mode is performed even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period in which the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is invalidated. This screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 300 are performed in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band in the middle of the change effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the unit 303 is operated, changes according to these operations are not reflected immediately, but are reflected after the end of the variable effect executed on the effect display device 1600. Normally, from the start to the end of the variation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variation effect is continuously transmitted from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4. Therefore, when adjusting the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band in the middle of the fluctuation production (the production sound that is output continuously is interrupted for a moment, (For example, the output of a production sound whose volume is suppressed or a production sound whose volume in a specific frequency band is not suppressed is resumed)).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the change effect, the change effect is generated. By reflecting after the end of the variation effect without reflecting the change according to this operation until the end, the effect sound that continuously flows during the variation effect is output with the preset content, After the production is finished and the output of the production sound that was continuously flowing according to the contents of the variation production is stopped, the volume in a specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 Since the production sound reflecting the adjustment can be output, the player does not feel uncomfortable. That is, during the changing effect where the effect sound is continuously output, the continuously output effect sound stops without reflecting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, and the next effect sound is output. By reflecting at the switching timing until output, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the period when the change effect is not performed, this operation is performed. The corresponding sound is immediately reflected and the production sound whose volume is adjusted in a specific frequency band is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4. Is done.

  As described above, the volume adjustment of the effect sound during the changing effect is immediately reflected, while the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. In other words, for sound-related information that may have an adverse effect on the scheduled production with the changing production being performed, such as giving the player a sense of incongruity by changing the production sound, the change during the production of the production will be prohibited and the production effect will be reduced. It comes to deter.

  Further, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the fact may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player. For example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band in the middle of the variation production, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is performed. Although it is not reflected immediately, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by displaying a mini-character for setting the volume on the effect display device 1600 and displaying a standby message such as “Please wait a moment” in the balloon of this mini-character. The player may be notified that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for receiving is normally received. Further, a standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is normally received is specified. For example, a volume setting mini-character may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a message “Please wait a minute” The player indicates that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 for performing the standby display 1 such as “Ne” and adjusting the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band is normally received. When the remaining time until the timing for reflecting the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is a predetermined time after the notification to the effect display device 1600 "3" in the balloon of this Minikyara to display the Minikyara for volume setting, "2", may be performed stand-by display 2 to perform a countdown, such as "1". Furthermore, when the timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band has been reached, a notification to that effect may be given. Reflection display such as “selection reflection start!” Or the like may be performed in the balloon.

  In the above-described example, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed are previously set as the equalizer setting patterns. The volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed by switching the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band, and the specific frequency. Switching between two levels (on and off), with the band volume being suppressed. Note that a plurality of equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in a specific frequency band are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and a plurality of levels of volume suppression in a specific frequency band are different by switching between these equalizer settings. You may make it switch to a state. For example, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, the equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and the volume adjustment switch turning operation of the volume adjustment switch or the production operation unit 300 Equalizer setting C (for example, change to volume 3 if the set volume is volume 6) to be suppressed to half the volume set according to the rotation operation of rotation operation unit 302 of As the setting pattern is stored and the volume of the production sound in the specific frequency band is adjusted, the volume of the specific frequency band is changed by switching to one of the equalizer setting A, the equalizer setting B, and the equalizer setting C. When the volume is not suppressed, when the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and when the volume of a specific frequency band is And while suppressing half the volume of the volume that is set in accordance with the rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the turning operation and staging operation unit 300 of the switch may be set so as to be switched to three stages of. This makes it possible to perform settings that match the preferences of various players.

  In addition, the production sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the above, but also includes a sound frequency band, a low frequency range, and the like. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume of speech generated from a character or the like during a fluctuation production. (If there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the low range may be adjusted. Further, it may be possible to adjust a production sound (confirmation sound) for notifying the jackpot confirmation, a payout sound when paying out a prize ball, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as a specific frequency band, and for example, the volume of both the high sound range and the low sound range may be adjusted. In this case, each of the high sound range and the low sound range may be adjusted together (for example, an operation of switching to one of a state where the high sound region is not suppressed and a state where the high sound region is suppressed and a state where the low sound region is not suppressed are suppressed. The operation to switch to one of the states is collectively performed in one operation), and each is adjusted (for example, the operation to switch to one of the state that does not suppress the high range and the state that suppresses the state and the state that does not suppress the low range are suppressed The operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be able to select any one of a plurality of setting modes (such as high tone cut, payout sound cut, jackpot fixed sound cut). This makes it possible to perform settings that match the preferences of various players.

  Further, when a continuous production sound is output during a big hit game state or a small hit game state, the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, While adjusting the output from the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4 immediately, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the end of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. As a result, the output of the continuous production sound is stopped, and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is adjusted at the switching timing until the next production sound is output. By reflecting the output from the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a sense of incongruity. Note that, during the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the player's attention to the content of the performance is lower than the variation effect. You may make it reflect immediately in the output from the 3rd top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sounds of the main body frame 4. FIG.

  In addition, when continuous production sound is output in a game state different from the normal state such as during the short-time state, the volume adjustment of the production sound is performed with the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side. In order to adjust the volume of the specific frequency band in the middle of the variation effect, the production operation is immediately reflected in the output from the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4 When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 300 is operated, the change effect is performed after the change effect is finished without reflecting the change according to the operation until the change effect is finished. In order to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band when not being operated, the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated. Top center speaker 462 of the door frame 3 side when the a top-side speaker 464, may be caused to immediately reflected on the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low body frame 4. That is, it is specified when the player is not paying much attention by reflecting after the end of the variation effect without reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band during the execution of the variation effect that the player pays the most attention. It is also possible to reflect the volume adjustment in the frequency band of the above and to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a sense of incongruity.

  Even when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the effect sound is actually produced from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4. Until the is output, the effect sound after the change is not output. Therefore, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band during the production of the fluctuation production, the specific frequency is obtained after the production of the fluctuation production. Even if the volume adjustment of the band is reflected, the effect sound after the change is the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main frame 4 after the start of the next variation effect. Is output from. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery process (winning determination lottery or the like) for starting the next variation effect is performed. Similarly, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the demonstration period in the effect display device 1600. Will immediately reflect the volume adjustment of the production sound in a specific frequency band, but if the production sound is not output as a demonstration, the production sound after the change will be displayed until the next variation production is started. It is not output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the side, and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4, but is output after the start of the variation effect.

  Further, the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the effect sound is initialized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 has not been played for a predetermined period of time and is in a waiting state for a customer, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the front of the pachinko machine 1 is The volume adjusted by the player sitting in the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. At the same time, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed. State).

  In addition, the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 are used to adjust the sound volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band during the execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (or may be the maximum volume). When 303 is operated, whether to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification may be appropriately set. Good.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 168, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) has occurred, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower dish 202 of the dish unit 200 is full of game balls. When the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during full tank error notification to be executed, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately used as a notification sound. When a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the state where the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side is continued. You may make it output the notification sound after a change from the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4 and the top side speaker 464. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side as a full error notification (for example, “please pull out the sphere!”) Reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. (For example, when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, it is output with a female voice, and when the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, it is output with a male voice.)

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 169, the volume of a specific frequency band is set during the door opening error notification that is executed when a serious abnormality (door opening error) is detected such that the door frame 3 is opened. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the specific frequency band The volume adjustment may not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume of a sound (for example, “the door is open!”) Output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side as a door opening error notification in a specific frequency band. (For example, when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, it is output with a female voice, and when the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, it is output with a male voice) When such an abnormality occurs, volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is disabled and a notification sound in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 168, a full tank error at the time of occurrence of a minor abnormality (full tank error) as detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 that the lower tray 202 of the dish unit 200 is full of game balls. During the notification, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as effective, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. To do. In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, during the door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) is detected such that it is detected that the door frame 3 is opened, the rendering operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as effective, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It is like that. As described above, by appropriately setting whether or not the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound in accordance with the degree of abnormality (illegal level) that caused the error notification, it is possible to ensure that a serious abnormality is detected. Be able to discover.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the volume in a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side. In the state where the changed production sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass 464 and the bass sound of the main body frame 4, when a serious abnormality occurs, the environment change mode and the operation of the production operation unit 300 are performed. Without adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (off), and a notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the production sound is resumed after the notification sound is stopped, a specific sound corresponding to the environment change mode or the operation of the production operation unit 300 is selected. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that has been forcibly released is set (turned on) again, and the effect sound with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed on the door frame 3 side. The sound is output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band is enabled, and the volume adjustment in a specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected. When the production sound and the notification sound can be output immediately, and without adjusting the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 immediately in the production sound output. The case where the effect sound and the notification sound after the change can be output by delaying the timing is appropriately set according to the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game state, error state, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the production effect and to detect a serious abnormality with certainty.

[16. Change of winning probability etc.]
In the pachinko machine 1, the set values such as probabilities such as big hits and small hits may be changed. Hereinafter, a modified example in which a set value such as probability of big hit or small hit can be changed will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board and displays the set or selected setting value. Control the instrument.

  On the setting board, a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and A setting indicator for displaying the set or selected setting value is provided, and functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation. As described above, the setting board is provided on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged on the game island in the game store. This makes it possible to change the setting.

  In the present embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are taken into the payout control unit 633a. The setting indicator is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU responds to the setting as a table (hit determination table, big hit symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in special lottery etc. Select a table. Note that tables used in special lotteries and the like are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170, in this example, the “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, “small hit type”, “ordinary symbol probability”, and “second hit type according to the common figure type” The opening / closing pattern of the start port is set corresponding to each of the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value. The set value 1 is “1/319”, and the set value 2 is “ “1/309”, the setting value 3 is “1/299”, the setting value 4 and the setting value 6 are “1/279”, and the setting value 5 is “1/289”. In this example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the setting value is, and the larger the setting value is, the higher the probability of jackpot is. In the setting value 6 having the highest setting value, the jackpot probability is lower than the setting value 5. Yes. Note that the jackpot probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set so as to increase as the set value increases from the set value 1 to the set value 6.

  In addition, a small hit probability (ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that winning a small hit in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, The setting value 1 to the setting value 4 is “1/100”, the setting value 5 and the setting value 6 is “1/90”, and in the table used for the special drawing of the second special symbol, the setting values 1 to 1 are set. The setting value 5 is “50/100”, and the setting value 6 is “66/100”. In this example, in the case of a high setting value (setting value 5 or setting value 6), the occurrence frequency of the big hit gaming state is indirectly increased by increasing the small hit probability more than other setting values (low setting value). It has become. In this way, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit in the normal state by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, while the second special symbol In the table used for the special lottery, the small hit probability is substantially the same for all the set values, so that the continuation of the short time state (Ren-chan) can be enjoyed purely in the short time state.

  In addition, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol executed mainly in the normal state, the small hit probability of the set value 5 and the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4. On the other hand, in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol executed mainly in the time reduction state, only the small hit probability of the set value 6 is set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. Therefore, in setting value 4 and setting value 5, in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the lottery is performed with a different small hit probability, but in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the short time state Is a small lottery with the same probability. However, the big hit probability and the determination rate of the small hit type, which will be described later, are set so that the set value 5 is higher than the set value 4, and the set value 5 as a whole is more advantageous than the set value 4. Has been.

In addition, since the big hit probability in the normal state is high while the small hit probability is low, it is highly possible that the hit as the trigger for the transition control to the short time state as in the setting value 4 is “big hit”. A game that is unlikely to be a big hit via a "small hit" and a low hit as a chance to be controlled to shift to a short time state as in the setting value 5, while a "small hit" is low Providing a new game characteristic that can be realized by changing the set value and guessing the set value according to the type of hit as an opportunity to be controlled to shift to a short time state Can do.

  Note that the small hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the small hit probability may be set so as to increase as the set value increases from the set value 1 to the set value 6. . Further, the small hit probability according to some set values among the set values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hit probability according to any one of the set values lower than the some set values. You may make it do. For example, the small hit probability of the setting value 4 may be 1/100, and the small hit probability of the setting value 3 lower than the setting value 4 may be 1/90. In this case, by setting the ratio determined for the small hit type (the third small hit in this example) that is advantageous in the case of a small hit so that the set value 4 is higher than the set value 3 The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

  In addition, a determination ratio in the case of determining the type of small hit based on the fact that it is determined to be a small hit as a result of the special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)) is also set in the small hit symbol determination table. Selection ratio), a different value is set for each set value. In this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, the setting value 1 to the setting value 3 is decided at the ratio of 9/10 and the second small hit is 10 minutes. The ratio is determined at the ratio of 1 of the third small unit, and at the setting values 4 and 5, the ratio is determined at the ratio of 8/10 to the second small area, and at the ratio of 2/10, the third small area is determined. In the set value 6, the ratio is determined for the first small spot at a ratio of 1/10, determined at the second small ratio at the ratio of 6/10, and determined at the third small ratio at the ratio of 3/10. It is like that.

  In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the setting value 1 and the setting value 2 are decided at a ratio of three tenths and the first small hit is six tenths. The ratio is determined for the second small unit, determined by the ratio of 1/10 for the third small unit, and set value 3 and set value 4 are determined for the first small unit by the ratio of 2/10. 6 is determined for the second small unit, 2/10 is determined for the third small unit, and the set value 5 and the set value 6 are determined for the first small unit at a ratio of 1/10. It is determined for the second small slot at a ratio of 6/10, and is determined for the third small slot at a ratio of 3/10.

  In addition, as described above, the first small hit is for guiding the game ball received in the prize winning opening 2006 to the first loser opening 2535, and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state. The possibility of occurrence is extremely low. And in this example, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6, and other set values (set values) 1 to the set value 5) is not selected, and if the set value 1 to the set value 5 is always a big hit game when it is a small hit in a state disadvantageous to the player as compared to the short state of the normal state It is possible to execute the small hit gaming state while generating the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of occurrence of the state and expecting the big hit gaming state. That is, in the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, in the case of a small hit in a state disadvantageous to the player than the short time state of the normal state, while paying attention to the small hit gaming state while expecting the big hit gaming state However, if all of the game balls received in the winning prize winning opening 2006 are guided to the first loser opening 2535 and there is no possibility of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, the player will be disappointed, but at least By generating the second small hit or the third small hit with the possibility of generating a big hit gaming state, it is possible to draw attention with the expectation of the big hit gaming state during the small hit gaming state, and a decrease in the gaming interest Can be suppressed. On the other hand, although the first small hit may be selected in the case of the set value 6, it can be determined that the set value 6 is the highest set value by executing the first small hit in the normal state. It is possible to give the player more joy than the disappointment that was won in the first small hit, and to suppress the decline in the gaming interest.

  In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the short time state, the probability of hitting the game is higher than that in the normal state, so that the execution frequency of the small hit gaming state is high. Therefore, even if it is recognized that all of the game balls received at the winning prize winning opening 2006 after the first small hit are guided to the first loser opening 2535 and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Don't discourage players. In addition, when it is decided to win a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the low set value (set value 1 or set value 2) increases the determination ratio of the first small hit, and the high set value The decision rate per first small is reduced. That is, when the high set value is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol compared to the low set value, the ratio determined to the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player is reduced. Therefore, the high setting value is more advantageous to the player than the low setting value.

  In addition, as described above, the third small hit is to guide the game ball received in the winning prize winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007. It is a state substantially the same as that. In other words, a higher determination ratio for the third small hit is synonymous with an increase in the winning probability for the big hit. Increasing the ratio indirectly increases the probability of generating a big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the winning probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol per unit determination value indicating the normal per unit random number for determination per normal symbol) is set to a different value for each set value. It is “1/2”, and the setting value 6 is “1/2”. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal lottery is performed with the set value 6, the second start port 2411 always moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004. Therefore, it is more advantageous to the player than other set values.

  Further, in this example, when it is decided that the normal lottery is made as the normal lottery result, A per normal symbol (design A per common symbol) and B per normal symbol (design B per general symbol (design B1 per standard symbol) It is determined to be one of a plurality of types of normal symbols per symbol B5)) and C per symbol (design C per symbol) according to the type per symbol determined The mode (design A per universal symbol, symbol B per universal symbol, symbol C per universal symbol) is derived and displayed on a normal symbol display. Further, the opening / closing mode of the second start door 2411 is varied for each set value. Specifically, when the normal symbol becomes A per normal symbol, the opening / closing mode of “execution of 0.1 s once” is executed with all setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and the time-saving state When the normal symbol per A is sometimes used, the opening / closing mode of “execute 6s open once” is executed with all set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and when the normal symbol is B per normal symbol The odd number setting values (setting value 1, setting value 3, and setting value 5) are used to execute the opening / closing mode of “execution of 0.1 s twice”, and even setting values (setting value 2, setting value 4, setting) The value 6) is used to execute the “opening for 0.1 s once” opening / closing mode, and when the normal symbol becomes B in the time-short state, the setting value 1 to the setting value 3 is “6 s opening once”. Execute “open / close mode”, set value 4 and set value 5 execute “open / close 3s twice” open / close mode, and set value In running the "Run once 3s open" opening and closing manner.

  In the case of the set value 1 to the set value 5, the type per normal symbol is determined to one of the two types per normal symbol, A per normal symbol and B per normal symbol. In the case of setting value 6, the type per normal symbol is determined from any of the three types per normal symbol: A per normal symbol, B per normal symbol, and C per normal symbol. . When the normal state becomes C per normal symbol, the opening / closing mode of “execute 0.1s 6 times” is executed with the set value 6 and when the normal state becomes C per normal symbol, it is set. An opening / closing mode in which the value 6 is “execution of 1s 6 times” is executed.

  As described above, the operation mode of the second start port door 2411 (opening / closing mode of the second start port 2004) that opens the second start port 2004 based on the normal lottery result being the normal hit is the set value. Therefore, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second start door 2411.

  The setting key is an opportunity to change to the setting change mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion portion) and maintaining the contact short circuit or open state by turning the key to the setting position. It is a switch that outputs a signal. Note that other switches may be used without providing the setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), and the setting change switch is ended by long pressing the setting change switch in the setting change mode. May be.

  Further, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the power supply is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the setting change mode is started by continuing the RAM clear switch operation for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). If the RAM clear switch is operated while the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch continues to be operated for less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by long pressing the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, the operation may be detected at the falling edge of the setting change switch.

  The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select setting values (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the setting value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. The set value is not limited to six levels, and may be a smaller number (for example, two levels) or a larger number (for example, eight levels).

  The set value changes the operating rate of the condition device (that is, the probability of hitting a special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. Also, depending on the set value, the ratio of probability variation big hit, the percentage of short time after big hit (ST), the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability per usual figure, the prize balls of the general winning opening, starting opening and big winning opening The number of prize balls that a player can acquire may be changed by changing various parameters relating to the game such as the number.

  The setting confirmation switch is constituted by, for example, a momentary switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting the set value to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch may be configured with switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that the switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be constituted by a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be constituted by a momentary toggle switch.

  The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch. Moreover, you may determine the setting value selected in response to operation | movement of the other switch and sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, the contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 when the handle 182 is touched, the operation of the single button operation sensor 194, the operation of the ball rental button, the operation of the return button, The selected setting may be confirmed by, for example, detecting a winning of a game ball at the start ports 2002 and 2004. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for gaming) or a switch that is not operable by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

  That is, in order to set the gaming performance in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. .

  Further, the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting confirmation switch may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed using only the RAM clear switch. For example, the power supply is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the setting change mode is started by continuing the RAM clear switch operation for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). If the RAM clear switch is operated while the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch continues to be operated for less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch, the setting value can be selected by an operation for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) of the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode, and the predetermined time of the RAM clear switch is set instead of the setting confirmation switch. The set value can be determined by the above operation (long press). Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long pressing the RAM clear switch after the setting is confirmed.

  The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a setting key). Note that the setting indicator may be configured by a number of LEDs that can be set instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an error type display using a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error is provided on the payout control board 633. The set value and the current set value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the error type display and the set value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in the error type display, and the dot may be turned on in the set value display. Also, the error type may be lit (not blinking) and the set value may be blinked.

  In this example, the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633. However, the setting board may be connected to the power board 630 in the power board cover 631. By providing the setting board alongside the power supply board 630 (or inside the power supply board cover 631), the setting key and the power switch that are operated when the setting is changed are arranged nearby to improve the operability of the setting change. it can.

  Further, as will be described later, the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310.

  As yet another form, the setting board may be configured as a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch, and a setting indicator may be mounted on any of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the main control board 1310.

[16-1. Setting change process]
Next, processing related to setting change will be described. FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing the set value.

  In this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control-side power-on process is executed, and the setting change mode start condition is satisfied in the main control-side power-on process. The set value is changed.

  Specifically, the main control MPU performs initial setting and activation setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process, and then determines the state of the setting key, and the setting key is turned on. If operated, the setting change mode for changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines that the setting key is turned on when the setting key operation signal is received. . In addition, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 is operated, the handle touch sensor 192 is detected by touching the handle 182, or a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (the balance of the prepaid card is present). The setting change mode may not be started when there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, the setting change mode may not be started even when there is a possibility that some sort of fraud is being performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error is detected).

  When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU is data other than the game state (for example, information on the probability change state, the short time state, and the prize ball) in the game control area of the built-in RAM, and the pachinko machine 1 A first RAM clear process for clearing data indicating the set value information is executed.

  Next, setting value 1 to setting value 6 are switched by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU completes the first RAM clear process, it transmits a first RAM clear process end command to the payout control unit 633a. When the main control MPU receives the first RAM clear process end command, the payout control unit 633a displays a set value on the setting display. As an initial value (for example, setting value 0) blinks, the setting value displayed on the setting display is switched every time the setting change switch is operated (loop between setting value 1 and setting value 6).

  Note that when the main control MPU executes the first RAM clearing process, the set value is cleared and becomes an unset state. Also, the setting change mode cannot be terminated when the set value is not set. If the power is cut off during the setting change mode with the set value not set, the power is turned on again. Then, the setting change mode is performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process for monitoring the state of the setting key is performed until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is changed according to the setting key being turned on. To be started.

  Further, the payout control unit 633a checks whether or not the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame release switch is OFF, and the main body frame release switch is ON (the main body frame 4 is set to the outer frame 2). Is not opened), the loop is repeated until the body frame opening switch is turned off, and the operation of the setting confirmation switch is not accepted. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

  If the setting confirmation switch is operated when the main body frame opening switch is turned off or when the main body frame opening switch is turned off, the payout control unit 633a confirms and displays the setting value displayed on the setting display ( The flashing display is ended and the lighting is displayed), and a setting change end command indicating the set value determined is transmitted to the main control MPU.

  When the main control MPU receives the setting change end command, it stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. Thereby, a lottery process or the like according to the determined set value is performed.

  The main control MPU performs a power failure clear process (step S14) when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the set value is changed by the above-described processing.

  When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a finishes displaying the setting value on the setting display (does not display the setting value). May be. When the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is finished, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display. Thereby, the game clerk can change the set value after grasping the current set value.

  Further, when executing the setting change mode, it may be notified. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, a setting change mode start command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of starting the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting change mode start command is received. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform predetermined display (for example, during a setting change) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is ended, that is, when the setting key is operated to be turned off, a setting change mode end command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the end of the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting is changed. Based on the reception of the change mode end command, the peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display performed on the effect display device 1600. It should be noted that the set value determined as the predetermined display or the set value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in this case, it may be deleted at the end of the setting change mode. Good.

  The main control MPU may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display in a special form that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all special symbol indicators are turned off or turned on).

  On the other hand, after the initial value setting and activation setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, step The process after S14 is executed.

  In the main control-side power-on process, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, deletes various information, or the determination in step S30. When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match at step S32, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in the determination at step S32, that is, the main control side power-off process If it is determined that the game has not been completed normally, in step S38, data other than the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area and the game state (for example, information on the probability change state, the short time state, and the prize ball) After executing the second RAM clear process for clearing the data indicating (), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). . Thus, unlike the first RAM clear process, the set value information is not initialized in the second RAM clear process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear process can be executed to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and when the power is turned on, the second RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Information relating to the gaming state (for example, information relating to the probability variation state, the short time state, and the prize ball) can be cleared by executing the process. Also, the first RAM clear process is executed by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch is operated to execute the second RAM clear process. Clear information on the state (for example, information on the probability change state, time reduction state, prize ball), that is, the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information on the game state (eg information on the probability change state, time reduction state, prize ball) It is possible to clear both. Thus, one or both of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

  In this example, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine it. The setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency) is transmitted, or the power supply voltage is grounded. An intermediate potential signal that is not a voltage may be output. In order to prevent an unauthorized act of starting the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminals of the setting keys, a signal relating to the operation of the setting keys is issued from the payout control unit 633a by the signal that cannot be generated by the short-circuiting of the terminals. It is because it is preferable to transmit to.

[16-2. Fluctuation production according to the set value]
Next, the variation effect according to each set value will be described. FIG. 172 is a fluctuation pattern table referred to in the fluctuation pattern setting process (first fluctuation pattern setting process, second fluctuation pattern setting process).

  In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern type selected according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process (see FIG. In FIG. 172 (A)), for example, a setting suggestion mini-character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “may be low?”, “May be 1, 2, 3?” Or the like is displayed in a balloon of the mini-character. By doing this, the deviation variation pattern 25 for executing the “low setting suggestion effect” that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is either 1, 2, or 3 can be selected from the set values 1 to 3. For example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “maybe it is high?” Or “is any of 4, 5, 6?” Is displayed in the balloon of the mini-character. Off variation pattern 26 for executing the "High Set suggesting demonstration" suggests that the set value of the slave unit 1 is one of 4, 5, 6 are selectable setpoint 4 setpoint 6. For this reason, when the “high setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variation effect, the player can recognize that the setting value is 4 or more at the minimum, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  Further, for example, a mini-character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “Is it even number?” Or “Is 2, 4, 6?” Or the like is displayed in a balloon of the mini-character, etc. The deviation variation pattern 27 for executing the “even setting suggesting effect” that suggests that the set value is any of 2, 4 and 6 can be selected by the set value 2, the set value 4, and the set value 6, for example. The setting display value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying the setting suggestion mini-character on the effect display device 1600 and displaying “an odd number?”, “One of 1, 3, 5?”, Etc. in the balloon of the mini-character. The deviation variation pattern 28 for executing the “odd setting suggesting effect” that suggests that any one of 1, 3, and 5 is selectable with the setting value 1, the setting value 3, and the setting value 5. Therefore, when the “even number setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variation effect, it is one of the setting value 2, the setting value 4, or the setting value 6, and when the “odd setting suggestion effect” is executed, the setting value 1, the setting value is set. 3 and the player can recognize that the set value is 5. The set value can be estimated by combining the execution history of the “low setting suggestion effect” and the “high setting suggestion effect”. That is, if the “odd setting suggestion effect” and the “low setting suggestion effect” are executed, the setting value 1 or the setting value 3 is executed, and the “odd setting suggestion effect” and the “high setting suggestion effect” are executed. If the “even setting suggesting effect” and “low setting suggesting effect” are executed, the setting value is 2, and “even setting suggesting effect” and “high setting suggesting effect” Can be inferred to be the set value 4 or the set value 6. In this way, in this example, a new game property is provided in which a set value is estimated by a combination of executed setting suggestion effects among a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

  Further, in this example, for example, a setting suggestion mini character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying “Maybe the best?” Or “6?” In the balloon of the mini character. The off-set fluctuation pattern 29 for executing the “maximum setting suggesting effect” suggesting that it is 6 can be selected only at the set value 6. Therefore, when the “maximum setting suggestion effect” is executed in the variation effect, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and the gaming interest is improved. Further, in the case of the set value 6, it is possible to select the deviation variation pattern 31 for executing the “highest setting finalization effect” when the reach is not reached or the reach is lost, and the set value is set for the player. It is possible to notify that the setting is the maximum setting value 6 and to confirm that the maximum setting has been determined, and to improve the gaming interest by allowing the player to recognize that the setting has been determined.

  Further, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table (FIG. 172) referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process. In (B)), for example, the setting suggestion mini-character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying “maximum setting confirmed!”, “6 confirmed!”, Etc. in the balloon of the mini-character. The small hit variation pattern 33 and the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting finalization effect” informing that the value is 6 can be selected only with the set value 6. For this reason, when the “maximum setting finalization effect” is executed in the variation effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and the game entertainment is improved. .

  Further, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 172 (C )), The big hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “highest setting finalization effect” can be selected only with the set value 6. For this reason, when the “maximum setting finalization effect” is executed in the variation effect when the big hit is achieved, the player can recognize that the setting value is the maximum setting value 6, and the jackpot gaming state is executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a double joy, so that the gaming interest is improved.

  In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the short-time state, the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern table (FIG. 172) referred to when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the second variation pattern setting process. In (D)), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting confirmed effect” can be selected only at the set value 6. For this reason, when the “maximum setting finalization effect” is executed in the variation effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and further, the prize winning opening Since the game ball that entered in 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 to win the third jackpot that generates a big hit game state, double joy can be given to the player. Interest is improved.

  As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, the set value 1 to the set value 4 have a small hit probability “1/100”, whereas the set value 5 and the set value 6 are higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4 “90 minutes”. 1 ”. Similarly, in the short-time state, the set value 1 to the set value 5 have a small hit probability “1/10”, whereas the set value 6 is “1/9” higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5. It is said.

  Further, the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “highest setting finalizing effect” that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time-short state is for a long period (155 s). The change time of the change pattern that can be selected with the set value 1 to the set value 5 lower than the set value 6 is longer than the change time. Further, at the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 having a longer variation time than the small hit variation patterns 1 to 3 is set higher than the set values 1 to 5 lower than the set value 6. In other words, at the setting value 6 where the small hit probability is higher than the other setting values, the variation time of the variation effect executed in the time reduction state is long. As described above, the set value 6 has a higher hit probability than the set value 1 to the set value 5, and if the hit value is further reduced, the game ball that has entered the prize winning hole 2006 is the first V winning opening 2007. Since the ratio determined for the third small hit that causes the big hit gaming state to be set to be higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5, it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short time. Therefore, by increasing the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 and the small hit variation pattern 34 in which the variation time is set longer than that of the other small hit variation patterns in the case of the set value 6 from the set value 1 to the set value 5. The number of executions of fluctuating effects per unit time is suppressed, and improvement in gambling is suppressed.

  In this example, the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are distributed in substantially the same manner for all setting values. However, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6, the variation pattern unique to the setting value 6 (the deviation variation pattern 29 to the deviation variation). Since the pattern 31, the small hit variation pattern 33, the small hit variation pattern 34, and the big hit variation pattern 34) are provided, the distribution of random numbers for variation pattern determination is different. Therefore, in this example, only the variation pattern determination random numbers distributed to a specific variation pattern (adjustment variation pattern) in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6 are adjusted to distribute the variation pattern determination random numbers. As described above, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers distributed to the specific variation pattern are adjusted without changing the distribution of the variation pattern determination random numbers for all the variation patterns. As a result, the load in adding or deleting the variation pattern is reduced, and the design of the gaming machine becomes easy. It should be noted that the specific variation pattern can maintain a certain frequency of occurrence even if the number of distribution of the variation pattern determination random numbers is reduced, and at least the variation pattern determination random numbers set in other setting values. It may be adjusted so as to have 60% or more with respect to the distribution number, and the appearance rate may not be excessively lowered as compared with other setting values.

  In this way, in this example, according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the small hit probability and the variation time of the variation effect executed when the special lottery result is the small hit are made different, thereby balancing with gambling. Have taken.

  In addition, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effects (low setting suggestion effects, high setting suggestion effects, even setting suggestion effects, odd setting suggestion effects, highest setting suggestion effects, highest setting finalization effects) are out of the first special lottery results in the normal state Alternatively, it is most easily executed when the reach is out of reach, and there are many types of setting suggesting effects that can be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the second special lottery in the short-time state is out of reach or reach, or the special lottery result (the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result) in the normal state or in the short-time state is small hit or big hit In this case, it is harder to execute than the case where the result of the first special lottery in the normal state is out of reach or out of reach, and there are few types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. In other words, during the short-time state or small hits, the setting suggestive effect is executed less frequently than when the normal state is out of reach or reach, so that attention is paid to the acceptance of the game ball to the V prize opening. Yes.

[17. Guide passage group consisting of a first guide passage and a second guide passage]
[17-1. When the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the case where a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is provided, FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 174 is a specific effect example at the time of executing a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404. .

  As shown in FIG. 173, a right detection sensor 2404 that can detect the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is driven with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505 and abut against the stopper portion 1006 (so-called right hit), the guide passage group 2520 enters the first guide passage 2521. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2505 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hit), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, so that the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There is no.

  The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is driven into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 has the game. If the passage of the ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the way (launch strength) of the game ball B in accordance with the game state, and to change the area and the passage into which the game ball B is shot. First, during the small hit game, the prize winning hole 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is inserted into the opened prize winning hole 2006. Is required. For this reason, during the small hit game, the game balls are strong enough to enter the upstream space portion 2505 and abut against the stop portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to drive B (so-called right-handed).

  In addition, during the big hit game, the big prize opening 2005 provided at the lower right of the center object 2500 is in an open state, and the game ball B is required to enter the open big prize opening 2005. However, it is configured that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 with a higher probability than the exit of the first guide passage 2521. ing. Further, during the short-time state, the second starting port 2004 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is also opened based on the ball entering the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500. It is required to enter the game ball B into the second start opening 2005 that is in the open state, but the second guide passage 2522 is more than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B is configured to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the second start opening 2005 with a higher probability that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the player. For this reason, during the big hit game and the short-time state, the strong ball that enters the upstream space portion 2505 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a certain strength (a somewhat weaker strength than the right strike).

  Further, during the normal state, it is required to enter the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500. For this reason, during the normal state, it is the highest of the outer peripheral surfaces of the center accessory 2500 so as to flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 where the game ball B can enter the first start port 2002. It is necessary to hit the game ball B with the strength to enter the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the part that has become (so-called left-handed).

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (launch strength) of the game ball B according to the game state and to change the area and the passage into which the game ball B is shot. When B is not driven, the player is alerted to drive the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when the game ball B is not in the gaming state in which the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. If the completed state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

  First, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the short-time state, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is provided. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). The player is warned that the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174 (A), in the effect display device 1600, the first warning effect that notifies the message “please type in the second guide passage” is executed. As a result, during the big hit game and in the short-time state, the way of hitting is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2505 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hitting). The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. If the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 has not detected the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the execution of the first warning effect, the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521. It is determined that the state in which the is placed has been eliminated, and the first warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B during the big hit game and the short-time state, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the monitoring timer is set. The count value is incremented each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. When the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the first When one warning effect is executed but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the game is entered in the first guide passage 2521. The first warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the state in which the ball B is driven is eliminated, and information such as a monitoring timer and a count value is cleared. Also, when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short-time state after the start of the monitor timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state to be driven into the second guide passage 2522, information such as the monitor timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the first warning effect is executed, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the first warning effect on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been canceled, the game is switched to the second guide passage 2522 when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short-time state. The first warning effect is ended because the game ball B is no longer in a state to be shot.

  In addition, during the normal state, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B. Then, when it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the center role The player is warned that the game ball B should be shot into the area on the left side of the object 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), in the effect display device 1600, the second warning effect that notifies the user of the message “Please turn left” is executed. Thereby, during the normal state, the way of striking is changed to the strength to enter the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. Then, the player can grasp that the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500. When the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide path 2521 is canceled. The second warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521, and a monitoring timer is started. The count value is incremented every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. When the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the start of the monitoring timer (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the first 2 When the warning effect is executed but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B is detected with less than 5 balls detected in 5 seconds), the game is entered in the first guide passage 2521. The second warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the state in which the ball B is driven is eliminated, and information such as a monitoring timer and a count value is cleared. Also, when the game state is switched from the normal state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in the state to be shot in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the second warning effect on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been canceled, when the game state is switched from the normal state, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 is also displayed. The second warning effect is finished because the game ball B is no longer in a state to be shot.

  As described above, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when the game ball B is not in the gaming state in which the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520. When the played state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but the content of the warning is changed according to the gaming state. Thereby, even when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 when the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide passage 2521, which is the recommended area or passage? The player can accurately grasp.

  On the other hand, during the small hit game, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B. If it is not detected that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), a game is entered in the first guide passage 2521. The player is warned that the ball B should be shot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), in the effect display device 1600, the third warning effect that notifies the message “please type in the first guide passage” is executed. Thus, during the small hit game, the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 by changing the hitting method to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and contacting the stop portion 1006. Can grasp. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is ended. I have to.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer Has started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the third warning effect is executed, If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B has not been driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, and the third warning is issued. The production is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game after the monitoring timer is started and the game ball B is not in a state to be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, there is a state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fourth warning effect as canceled, the third warning effect is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the first guide path 2521 when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game. Has ended.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 must be present. For example, the position may be a position that passes, for example, an inlet that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet that is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the opened prize winning port 2006. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

  In the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the game ball B is displayed in any manner in each gaming state. If the player is to perform a separate placement area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display made up of a right arrow image or a left-handed display made up of a left arrow image) to make the player always know that it should be driven, It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct the inclusion area instruction display. For example, a “display area for displaying a placement area instruction display” is provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is different from that area. It is desirable to provide a “display area for displaying the first to third warning effects” in the upper left part of the screen so that the respective guidance is superimposed and not obstructed.

  In the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, such warnings are realized as voice effects rather than displays. In that case, the priority of assignment to channels that are finitely provided for outputting sound is higher than various effect sounds set during the normal state, the big hit game, or the short-time state. It is desirable that the output be set as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacant (unused channel) in a finitely provided channel. Thereby, it becomes possible to effectively suppress a player who is unfamiliar with the game performance having various types of game balls B from receiving a disadvantage.

[17-2. When detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the second guide passage 2522 are entered. A case where the left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. FIG. 176 shows a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. It is a specific example of performance at the time of execution.

  As shown in FIG. 175, a right detection sensor 2404 that can detect the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, and the second A left detection sensor 2405 that can detect the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance, which is the upper end of the guide passage 2522. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is driven with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505 and abut against the stopper portion 1006 (so-called right hit), the guide passage group 2520 enters the first guide passage 2521. When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

  On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes. In other words, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not contact the stop portion 1006 and does not come into contact with the upstream space portion 2505 (the strength is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hit), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

  The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 includes detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. Is entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is driven into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Whether or not the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522 is monitored. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the left detection sensor 2405 plays the game. When the passage of the ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B. It is determined that the game ball B is not in a state of being driven into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

  In the present embodiment, as described in detail above, it is necessary to change the manner in which the game ball B is shot (launch strength) in accordance with the game state and to change the area and the passage into which the game ball B is shot. When the game ball B is not driven into the area or passage, the player is alerted to drive the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the normal state in which the game ball B should be shot into the left region of the center accessory 2500 The state in which one of the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined time. If continued, the player can be alerted.

  More specifically, during the normal state, it is recommended that the game ball B be driven into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 When the passage is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521. When the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, the second It is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2522, and these states continue for a predetermined time (for example, the game ball B is detected in 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). When five or more balls are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176 (A), the fourth warning effect is performed in the effect display device 1600 to notify the message “please make a left”. Thereby, during the normal state, the way of striking is changed to the strength to enter the left side of the front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500. Then, the player can grasp that the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500. If the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 It is determined that the state in which the game ball B is driven has been eliminated, and the fourth warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 detect the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is incremented. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds). In the case), the fourth warning effect is executed, but when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), The fourth warning effect is not executed and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared, assuming that the state in which the game ball B is driven into the one guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 is eliminated. Also, when the game state is switched from the normal state after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in the state to be shot in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. Then, after the execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). If the game state is switched from the normal state in addition to ending the fourth warning effect on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 has been canceled, However, the fourth warning effect is ended because the game ball B is no longer in a state to be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500.

  During the small hit game, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is used for the game ball B. If it is not detected that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), a game is entered in the first guide passage 2521. The player is warned that the ball B should be shot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), in the effect display device 1600, the fifth warning effect that notifies the message “please type in the first guide passage” is executed. Thus, during the small hit game, the game ball B should be driven into the first guide passage 2521 by changing the hitting method to the strength of entering the upstream space portion 2505 and contacting the stop portion 1006. Can grasp. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, and the fifth warning effect is ended. I have to.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer Has started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning effect is executed, If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, and the fifth warning is issued. The production is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, even when the gaming state is switched from the small hit game after the monitoring timer is started and the game ball B is not in a state to be driven into the first guide passage 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the fifth warning effect, when the monitoring timer is started and the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, there is a state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fifth warning effect as having been canceled, the fifth warning effect is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the first guide path 2521 when the game state is switched from the small hit game. Has ended.

  On the other hand, it is recommended that the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 during the big hit game and the short-time state, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). The player is warned that the game ball B should be shot at 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176 (C), the effect display device 1600 executes a sixth warning effect that notifies a message “please type in the second guide passage”. As a result, during the big hit game and in the short-time state, the way of hitting is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2505 and does not come into contact with the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hitting). The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. If the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated, and the warning effect is ended. Yes.

  More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the big hit game and the short-time state, it is determined that the game ball B is not driven into the second guide path 2522. The watchdog timer has started. When the state where the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the sixth warning effect is executed, whereas If the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated, The production is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. In addition, even when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short-time state after the start of the monitor timer and the game ball B is not in a state to be driven into the second guide passage 2522, the information such as the monitor timer is cleared. After the execution of the sixth warning effect, when the monitoring timer is started and the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, there is a state in which the game ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522. In addition to ending the sixth warning effect as having been canceled, the game ball B is no longer in a state to be driven into the second guide passage 2522 when the game state is switched from the big hit game or the short-time state. Warning production has ended.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of) the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 must be present. For example, the position may be a position that passes, for example, an inlet that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet that is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below the entrance that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 (near the entrance), but the game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 must pass therethrough. Any position may be used, and for example, an inlet that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, an outlet that is the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, and the second guide passage 2522 may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the accessory prize winning port 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the opened prize winning port 2006. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from being defective due to excessive passing of the game ball B.

  In the present embodiment, the detection sensors (the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520. One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes. For example, the game ball B that has entered the upstream space portion 2505 is provided with a single detection sensor in a path on the near side of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 so that the guidance is provided. Whether or not the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 can be detected by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is driven into the guide passage group 2520, and one detection sensor does not detect the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is possible to determine that the game ball B has not been driven into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when it is a normal state where the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the center accessory 2500, if the state in which one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time, By alerting the player, it is possible for the player to know whether or not the game ball B should be shot into at least the left area of the center accessory 2500.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the game ball B is displayed in any manner in each gaming state. If the player is required to make a placement area instruction display (for example, a right-handed display made up of a right arrow image or a left-handed display made up of a left arrow image) for making the player always know that it should be driven, It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to obstruct the inclusion area instruction display. For example, a “display area for displaying a placement area instruction display” is provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is different from that area. It is desirable that a “display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects” is provided in the upper left part of the screen so that the respective guidance is superimposed and not obstructed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized as voice effects instead of display. In that case, the priority of assignment to channels that are finitely provided for outputting sound is higher than various effect sounds set during the normal state, the big hit game, or the short-time state. It is desirable that the output be set as much as possible even in a situation where there is no vacant (unused channel) in a finitely provided channel. Thereby, it becomes possible to effectively suppress a player who is unfamiliar with the game performance having various types of game balls B from receiving a disadvantage.

[17-3. When the ball clogging hole is provided in the overlap area where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are arranged in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a sphere that can eliminate clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side. A case where the clogging clearance hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. FIGS. 177 and 178 are explanatory views showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  Although the details have been described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged forward in the front-rear direction at portions extending vertically on the left side of the accessory winning port 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It has a double-view portion 2520a that appears to overlap. In the overlapping portion 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 (A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is placed from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 in the overlapping portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 that can be inserted and that can remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side by inserting the rod-like member is provided. Specifically, a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided in the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and the portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent. Further, a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in a portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 as viewed from the front. It is located so as to coincide with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Thereby, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, so that the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B packed in the ball, and the ball-shaped blockage in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-rear direction.

  When a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member is also visually recognized from the front, and the first guide passage What is necessary is just to make it the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in the position which corresponds with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in the front side of 2521. Thereby, when the ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

  Further, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. Thereby, when the rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. . That is, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the clogging in the second guide passage 2522 is easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. be able to.

  In addition, a plurality of ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in a portion where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extend above and below the overlapping portion 2520 arranged in the front-rear direction. As a result, in any position of the second guide passage 2522 in the overlap portion 2520, even if the ball clogging occurs, the rod-shaped member may be inserted from the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in a location near the position. , Clogging of the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

  In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 is bent only in the left-right direction, whereas the second guide passage 2522 is complicated in that the passage is bent not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged with the ball than the first guide passage 2521. In addition, the overlapping portion 2520 in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is either an inlet that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 and an outlet that is the lower end. Since it is a part after bending from the entrance and the exit, even if the rod-like member is inserted from the entrance or the exit, the stick-like member does not reach the part. In this regard, a bar-like member may be inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A possible ball clogging hole 2523 is provided. Accordingly, when not only the clogged ball in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side but also the clogged ball in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side in the overlapping portion 2520a, by inserting the rod-shaped member, Ball clogging can be easily removed.

  In the above, in the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the ball passes through from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the front-rear direction. Although the clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided, another example of the clogging elimination hole 2523 capable of removing the clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side will be described below.

  As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A predetermined rod-like member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and a ball clogging elimination hole 2523 that can remove the clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting the rod-like member is provided. May be. In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, so that the game ball B clogged in the second guide passage 2522 is rod-shaped. The members can come into contact with each other, and the clogged ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-like member in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, a transparent light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 including the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows a rod-like member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being blocked by the light guide plate 3102.

  As a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), the overlapping portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction has a front side of the first guide passage 2521. The ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction toward the second guide passage 2522, but the shape of the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. It may be formed. In such a case, when the rod-like member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-like member can be moved greatly in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be moved. The clog can be easily removed.

  Further, in the vicinity of the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), a predetermined rod-shaped member is inserted into the second guide passage 2522 at a location where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging hole 2523 that can be removed from the left side of the first guide passage 2521 and can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member may be provided. That is, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521 in the left-right direction. In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2521, a rod-shaped member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, so that the ball clogs in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side). The bar-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B that has been played, and the blockage of the ball in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed by moving the bar-shaped member in the left-right direction.

  In addition, when the ball clogging clearance hole 2523 is provided on the left surface side of the second guide passage 2522 as in the first and third other examples, the ball clogging clearance hole is formed from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. It is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting a rod-like member through 2523, but the light guide plate 3102 is provided at a position adjacent to the rear of the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102. When the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-shaped member, when the design (first design 3102a, second design 3102b) is light-emitting decorated on the light guide plate 3102, there are also parts that are not related to the design. Although the light is guided (light is reflected), there is a problem that if the damaged part overlaps the pattern, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the pattern. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide the light guide decoration area | region where a pattern is exposed in the right area part of the light guide plate 3102 which is a part adjacent to the 2nd guide channel | path 2522. FIG. The light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate 3102 is manually moved to the left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where it does not contact the light guide plate 3102 as a previous step. May be. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, there is a movable member that can move to a position where the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position where it is not concealed. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, the movable member may be configured to move to a position where the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is not concealed as a previous step. In such a configuration, when there is no need to remove the clogged ball in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position where the ball clogged hole 2523 is hidden, and the player visually recognizes the ball clogged hole 2523. There is an advantage that the decorativeness as a whole including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[17-4. About the ball clogging prevention structure near the exit of the first guide passage and the second guide passage arranged in parallel]
As described with reference to FIG. 120 (a), the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a ( When the ball is hit to the right, the game ball B abutting against the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning port door 2511 that closes the accessory winning port 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then the guide passage group It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the game unit 2400 and the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430. The player is guided to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left portion of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

  On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 120 (b), when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward. Then, after being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction in the overlap portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower attacker unit 2400 side. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is placed on the left side of the normal winning port 2003 or the normal winning port 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted with the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to enter any one of the parts, and in rare cases, it is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharge opening 2435 that is lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008.

  At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, since the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the outlets of the second guide passage 2522 are located on the left side, the respective first outlets are arranged side by side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of the game balls B discharged from the exits flow in a short time, and clogging of the balls is likely to occur below the exits. In this regard, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and the first opening 2431 is provided. When the game ball B enters, the player is guided to the outlet 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. Thereby, in the vicinity of the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a part of the game ball B discharged from these exits is guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is difficult for the game ball B to stay near the exit of the ball and it is possible to prevent the ball from becoming clogged. Even if ball clogging occurs below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B discharged from these outlets is guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. Thus, the game balls B can be prevented from being stacked up to the insides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As described above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and the position thereof is the exit of the second guide passage 2522. Rather, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is provided closer. An inside of the first guide passage 2521 is provided with an accessory winning opening 2006 that is opened during the small hit game, but due to a clogged ball below the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, When the game ball B is stacked up to the position of the prize winning hole 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, the game ball B more than expected flows into the opened prize winning hole 2006, and the player is illegal. Will be able to get a good profit. In this regard, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is closer to the outlet of the second guide passage 2522. Even if a ball clogging occurs below the exit of the two guide passages 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being stacked up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the one guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is below the exits of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, and the right side of the attacker who can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, an out-port different from the out-port 1008 is provided in the attacker right passage 2430 so that the game ball B entered from the first opening 2431 You may make it discharge | emit out of the game area | region 5a from an out port. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is efficiently guided out of the game area 5a from an out port different from the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from staying in the vicinity of their exits, and to prevent the ball from becoming clogged.

  Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, an attacker right passage that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position near the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Although the first opening portion 2431 of 2430 is provided, the passage where the game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 and the outside of the game area 5a are also located near the exit of the second guide passage 2522. An out port different from the out port 1008 from which the game ball B can be discharged may be provided. Even in such a case, a part of the game ball B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided outside the game area 5a, and in the vicinity of these exits. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying and to prevent the ball from clogging.

  In the above, near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 and to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a. An out port different from the possible out port 1008 may be provided. In the following, another example of the case where a second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 will be described. Show. FIG. 179 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided in the vicinity of the inlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As shown in FIG. 179, the game ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5a between the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that enters the upstream space portion 2505 and abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right hit), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. Part of the game ball B that has been driven enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2505 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hit), the ball enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the game ball B that has been placed enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. In other words, a part of the game ball B that is driven to enter the upstream space portion 2505 enters the second out port 1013. As a result, a part of the game ball B that is driven to enter the upstream space portion 2505 when the player aims at either the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. However, since the game balls B are guided from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, the number of game balls B entering the inside from the entrances is reduced, and the balls are blocked inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 Can be prevented.

  In addition to the above, what is the outlet 1008 that can discharge the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a only when a ball clog occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522? Another out port may be provided. Hereinafter, another example of a case where a second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521 will be described. FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided in the vicinity of the outlet inside the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (A), slightly above the outlet, which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, is in front of the game area 5a (game board 5), which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided that is open and capable of discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a. Further, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory winning port 2006 that is opened during the small hit game, but the second out port 1013 is located on the downstream side of the accessory winning port 2006. It is provided in the position. In such a configuration, when no ball clogging occurs below the second out port 1013, such as below the outlet of the first guide passage 2522, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the second out The ball passes through the front of the second out port 1013 without entering the mouth 1013.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (B), when ball clogging occurs below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game reaches the position of the second out port 1013. When the balls B are stacked, the game balls B that have further circulated through the first guide passage 2521 enter the second out port 1013. That is, in the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is not stacked up to a position above the second out port 1013. As described above, the prize winning opening 2006 that is opened during the small hit game is provided inside the first guide path 2521. However, the ball is clogged near the exit of the first guide path 2521. As the game ball B is piled up to the position of the prize winning hole 2006 provided in the first guide passage 2521, more than expected game balls B flow into the opened prize winning hole 2006, Players will be able to earn fraudulent profits. In this regard, the game ball B is discharged out of the game area 5a only when a ball clogging occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 on the downstream side of the bonus winning prize opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, even if a ball clogging occurs near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the accessory winning prize port 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 Before the game ball B is stacked up to the position, the game ball B can be discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and the player can obtain an illegal profit. Can be prevented.

[18. About detection of outlet when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after turning on the power, to a ball entrance provided on the game board 5 (first start port 2002, second start port 2004, grand prize port 2005, prize winning port 2006, etc.). When the game ball B enters and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of the respective balls is counted to perform a predetermined calculation, and the calculation result is used as information about the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether to continue the operation or stop (stop) depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. Stop (stop). An execution state of calculation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an execution state of an operation when an abnormality occurs.

  First, in the main control board 1310, as a ball opening provided on the game board 5, a general winning port 2001, a normal winning port 2003, a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, a large winning port 2005, an accessory When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the prize winning combination, respectively. The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game ball B and adds it to the corresponding number-of-entry counters. With such a number-of-entries counter, it is possible to grasp the number of entrances of the game balls B that have entered the respective entrances among the game balls B that are driven into the game area 5a.

  On the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 is used as the game ball B. Both are added to the out number counter. By this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 out of the game balls B driven into the game area 5a.

  In the main control board 1310, a predetermined calculation is performed using a ball count counter and an out count counter. As a specific example, the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrance provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a by adding all of the number of entrance counters. Can be calculated. Further, the total number of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding all of the number-of-ball counters and the number-of-out counters.

  The above calculation results are displayed on a predetermined display device as information related to the pachinko machine 1. However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of game balls B that have entered the respective entrances and out openings 1008 based on the respective entrance number counters and out number counters are used as they are. It is also possible to output. Examples of the predetermined display device include an effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 and a hall computer managed by the hall side outside. Further, a monitor may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and displayed on the monitor. Among these, when information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it can be grasped at a position where both the player and the hall can see, whereas the hall computer or the main control board 1310 is monitored. When information is displayed on the screen, it can be grasped at a position that only the hall side can visually recognize.

  In addition, as information displayed on a predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that have entered the entrance provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 are displayed. In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not the degree of the game ball B entering the entrance or the out entrance 1008 is within a normal numerical range based on the ratio. When a normal game is being performed, the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a enter the entrance at a predetermined rate. If the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance is too high, you can suspect that you are entering the entrance with an illegal act. On the other hand, when the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 is too high, it can be suspected that the out port 1008 has been intruded by an illegal act.

  In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 850, the payout detection sensor 950 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout counter. With this payout number counter, the number of game balls B paid out to the player can be grasped. Since the total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a, calculated by all of the number-of-entry counters and the out-number counter, is the total number of game balls B used by the player, By calculating the difference from the paid-out number of game balls B, the net increase of the game balls B can be calculated, and such a net increase of the game balls B is displayed on a predetermined display device. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the entrance or the out-out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 and the pachinko machine 1 A frame-side outlet sensor 3037 capable of detecting a game ball B that is discharged to the rear outside (the island facility side of the game hall) (see FIG. 94) but passes through the ball outlet 629 is provided. Yes. When the frame side out port sensor 3037 detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B enters the entrance or the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the joined game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the frame-side out sensor 3037 detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side out number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, the number of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a can be ascertained.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction path 580b of the payout device 580 is also the upper ball extraction path 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower full ball. After passing through the lower bulb extraction passage 610c of the path unit 610 and being released from the downstream end opening of the lower bulb extraction passage 610c to the bulb extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629. Is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall), and is discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 as well as the game ball B driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B is also configured to be detected by the frame-side out port sensor 3037. Here, in consideration of the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is as follows. It is anxious to make various calculations by eliminating (invalidating). In response to this, in the configuration in which the game side ball outlet sensor 3037 detects the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the frame side out port sensor 3037 is connected to the upstream side. Is provided with another ball removal detection sensor (not shown), and the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and further detects the ball removal detection sensor. It is desirable that the number of game balls detected by the above is subtracted from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor and once subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side outlet sensor 3037. Thus, the number of game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially not reflected in the out number counter. In addition, in such a form, when the game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the gaming machine 1 is not energized (when the ball removal action of the payout device 580 is performed). However, there is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor 3037 can detect itself, but the game machine 1 is energized downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. When the game ball B is released (when the payout device 580 is removed), or when the game machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580. Although this is done (the ball withdrawal action of the payout device 580 has been made), the problem that occurs when the gaming machine 1 is energized in the middle of the ball removal is solved. Further, the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the separate passages without joining the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580. A configuration may be adopted in which the frame-side outlet sensor 3037 can detect only the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a. In such a configuration, a configuration in which the number of game balls detected by the above-described ball removal detection sensor is subtracted from the out number counter becomes unnecessary.

  As described above, the number of game balls B thrown into the game area 5a can be ascertained by the frame-side out number counter, but by adding all the number of entered balls and the out number counter, The total number of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a can be calculated. In other words, in a state where no game is being performed and the game ball B is not driven into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter matches the value obtained by adding all the number-of-ball counters and the out number counter. Will be. On the other hand, in a state in which the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, the frame side out port separated by a predetermined distance after the game ball B passes the detection sensor provided in the entrance port or the out port 1008. Since it passes through the sensor 3037, the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter changes as compared with the frame-side out-number counter.

  In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or the calculation is continued or stopped (stopped) differs depending on whether the abnormality is minor or severe. As shown in FIG. 181 (A), when a minor abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are continued without being stopped (stopped). As this mild abnormality, the game ball B is full in the upper plate 201 and the game ball B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, or the game ball B should be driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The right-handed state is mentioned. In these states, an effect that warns the player to guide the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 and an effect that warns the player to strike right are executed. Further, in these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2, and the entrance and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are compared. Thus, the game ball B cannot be artificially entered. For this reason, if a slight abnormality occurs, the number of balls entered and the number of out counters will not increase due to fraudulent action, and addition to the counter and calculation will be continued without being stopped (stopped). Yes.

  On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). As this serious abnormality, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2, and artificially with respect to the entrance and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this state, the game ball B can be entered. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped) so that the number-of-entry counter and the out-number counter do not increase due to an illegal act.

  In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensors provided at the entrance and the exit 1008 pass the game ball B. Detected. Further, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter before the occurrence and the calculation result are held, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are retained by the outer frame 2. After a severe abnormality has been resolved, such as being closed, the addition to the counter and computation are resumed. In addition, when a serious abnormality has occurred and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), the addition or calculation to the counter is performed by image display on a predetermined display device or sound output from the speaker. An effect at the time of cancellation to notify that it has been canceled is being executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), the occurrence of a severe abnormality occurs in addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter. Until the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out number counter The calculation related to addition to or the out counter is stopped (stopped) As a result, when a serious abnormality occurs such as the door frame 3 being opened from the outer frame 2, the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 can be grasped until a predetermined time elapses. . .

  For example, when the game sphere B becomes grape-shaped in the game area 5a and the ball is clogged, normal game cannot be performed, so that the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and the grape-shaped game sphere B However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B flows into the out port 1008 at the lower end as it is. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is a game ball B that has a high possibility of being discharged from the out port 1008 if it does not become grape-like. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-like game ball B, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. Since it is continued without stopping (stopping), the number of balls that the grape-like game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of the information regarding the out port 1008 can be improved. Note that it is unlikely that the grape-like game ball B will flow into the out port 1008 after a predetermined time has elapsed, and it is suspected that the ball has entered the out port 1008 by an unauthorized act. The calculation related to the addition to or the out counter is stopped (stopped).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 181 (C), the occurrence of a severe abnormality occurs in addition to the out number counter corresponding to detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter. Until the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from the hour, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued without being stopped (stopped), but the predetermined time elapses. Even before, if the out-port left sensor 3032 or the out-port right sensor 3033 detects a large number of game balls B in a short period of time, the addition to the out-number counter or the out-number counter at that time The operation related to is stopped (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, there is a possibility that more than the number of balls that are assumed to flow into the out port 1008 due to the removal of the grape-like game balls B flow into the out port 1008. Since it is suspected that the ball has entered the out mouth 1008 due to an illegal act, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 181 (D), when the door frame 3 is opened in the case where a serious abnormality has occurred, the output to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 is performed. For addition and calculation related to the out number counter, addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is opened. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). This is because when the door frame 3 is opened, it may be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B in the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, the game area 5a is opened. This is because the main body frame 4 that does not need to be opened is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-like game ball B. That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing ball clogging on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). To do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B has entered the entrance and out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the joined game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. The frame-side out sensor 3037 detects the game ball B. However, as shown in FIG. 181 (E), the frame-side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out sensor 3037 As for the addition to the frame and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter, the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to the frame side out number counter are stopped (stopped) when a serious abnormality occurs. For this reason, when a person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out-out corresponding to the detection by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 in a predetermined period. While the addition to the number counter is performed, the addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame side out port sensor 3037 is not performed. The number of grape-like game balls B that have been removed when the door frame 3 is opened can be ascertained based on the difference between the numerical value obtained by adding and the numerical value of the frame-side out number counter. In addition, about the number of entrances of such a grape-like game ball B, it is possible to display it on a predetermined display device as information on the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, as described above, in a state where no game is performed and the game ball B is not driven into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter includes all the number-of-balls counters and the out number counter. It will match the added value. On the other hand, in a state in which the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, the frame side out port separated by a predetermined distance after the game ball B passes the detection sensor provided in the entrance port or the out port 1008. Since it passes through the sensor 3037, the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter changes as compared with the frame-side out-number counter. Thus, as long as a normal game is being played, a difference of a predetermined number or more may occur in the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entry counters and the out-number counter compared to the frame-side out-number counter. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being performed by monitoring whether or not a difference greater than or equal to the predetermined number has occurred.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182, if a difference of a predetermined number or more is generated in the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entrance counters and the out-number counter as compared with the frame-side out-number counter, It is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and addition to the counter and computation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped, the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped by image display on a predetermined display device or sound output from the speaker. A stop-time effect that notifies the user of the event is being executed. Then, if a difference of a predetermined number or more is generated as compared with the frame-side out number counter with respect to the numerical value obtained by adding all the number-of-entering counters and the out-number counter, for example, on the game board 5 by an illegal act An object other than the game ball B is allowed to pass only through the provided entrance / out port 1008, or after the game ball B passes through a detection sensor provided at the entrance / out port 1008. It is possible to suspect that the ball is clogged until it passes through the frame-side out port sensor 3037. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage that a fault such as an illegal act or a clogged ball has occurred, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the state which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 were open | released from the outer frame 2 was illustrated as a serious abnormality, it is not limited to this, The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 Even if the game is not released from the outer frame 2, when it is detected that the game is progressing by an illegal act, addition to various counters and calculation are stopped (stopped). It may be. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) with respect to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not being performed. Then, the addition to various counters and the calculation can be stopped (stopped). In addition, either when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when illegal magnetism or vibration is detected in the state where the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2. In addition, although the addition to the various counters and the calculation are stopped (stopped), the fraud is detected only when improper magnetism or vibration is detected in a state where the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not opened from the outer frame 2. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the launch of the game ball B may be stopped immediately.

[18-1. About Out Exit Detection When Multiple Out Exits are Provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, apart from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side, and a third out port 1014 is provided on the midstream side. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the discharged game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of calculation when the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the game ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5a between the entrance that is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that enters the upstream space portion 2505 and abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right hit), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 with a high probability. Part of the game ball B that has been driven enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, when the game ball B is driven with a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2505 and does not contact the stop portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than the right-hand hit), the ball enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. However, a part of the game ball B that has been placed enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. In other words, a part of the game ball B that is driven to enter the upstream space portion 2505 enters the second out port 1013.

  Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003. A third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B that has entered from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the effect that the second out port 1013 is provided around the entrances of the first guide channel 2521 and the second guide channel 2522 in the guide channel group 2520 and the third out port 1014 are provided around the exit. The details of the above-mentioned effect have been described above. However, by providing the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 as described above, the balls are clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the second out port sensor 3035 capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013 and the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014 are detected. And a third out-port sensor 3036 that can detect this. When the second out port sensor 3035 detects the game ball B that has entered the second out port 1013, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out port sensor 3036 When the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor 3035 detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor 3036 detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is grasped by the second out number counter, whereas the game ball B that has entered the third out port 1014 by the third out number counter. The number of balls entered can be grasped.

  Note that the main control board 1310 performs a predetermined calculation using not only the ball count counter and the out number counter but also the second out number counter and the third out number counter. As a specific example, by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, among the game balls B driven into the game area 5a, the first provided on the game board 5 is provided. The number of game balls B discharged to the outside can be calculated without entering a ball entrance such as the start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. In addition, the total number of game balls B driven into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding the number-of-balls counter, the number-of-out counter, the second-out number counter, and the third-out number counter.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is driven into the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) is the second out mouth. It is designed not to enter 1013. For this reason, in the short-time state or the big hit game state, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time using the second out number counter. It is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game when the number is over a predetermined number per unit time.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (A), when the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is issued to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by sound output from a speaker. The warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, if the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the ingress on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 in the right area of the game area 5a. There is less opportunity for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (the normal winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the bonus winning opening 2006), which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes. In this regard, if the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is arranged so that the game ball B can easily enter the second out port 1013. It is possible to suspect that 5 has been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect early that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above description, whether or not the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time in the short-time state or the big hit game state is monitored. The number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 and the ingress port (out port 1008, third out port 1014) on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 A ratio of the number of game balls B to the number of balls may be calculated, and it may be monitored whether the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined rate. Even in such a case, it can be determined that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform if the rate of entry of the game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high.

  Similarly, in a state in which the game ball B is driven into the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) enters the third out port 1014. Designed to prevent entry. For this reason, in the short-time state or the big hit game state, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time using the third out number counter. It is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game when the number is over a predetermined number per unit time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is issued to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by sound output from a speaker. The warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, if the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the input on the downstream side of the third out port 1014 in the right area of the game area 5a. There is less opportunity for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (the normal winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005), which is disadvantageous for the player. In this regard, when the number of game balls B that have entered the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is arranged so that the game ball B can easily enter the third out port 1014. It is possible to suspect that 5 has been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to detect early that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above description, whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time in the short-time state or the big hit game state is monitored. The ratio between the number of game balls B that entered the third out port 1014 and the number of game balls B that entered the out port 1008 and the game port B that is downstream of the third out port 1014 May be calculated to monitor whether the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio. Even in such a case, it can be determined that a normal right-handed game is difficult to perform if the rate of entry of the game balls B entering the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of game balls B that have entered the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time in the short-time state or the big hit game state, The addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are continued, but when the predetermined number or more per unit time is reached as in the above-described embodiment. Alternatively, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or the calculation related to the out number counter may be stopped. In such a configuration, even if the game ball B enters the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter or the third out number counter does not increase. The reliability of the information regarding the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be shot into the left area of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is shot into the right area of the game area 5a, The game ball B may enter the out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. For this reason, in the normal state, when the second outlet sensor 3035 or the third outlet sensor 3036 detects the game ball B, the right-hand strike is detected by image display on a predetermined display device or sound output from the speaker. An instruction effect is instructed to change to left-handed.

[19. About light emission history after light production using light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays a variation of the decorative symbol. During the variation display, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The light guide plate 3102 provided in front of the display area is decorated with light emission a plurality of times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise at the plurality of times, thereby suggesting a big hit expectation degree for the variable display. Production can be performed. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3100) are emitted in the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Even after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is extinguished, a history effect that causes the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 to continuously emit light with the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is displayed as the history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. It can be executed.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis processing in step S601, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. To decide. In addition, when it is determined that the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is to be executed, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect is determined by referring to the light emission color pattern table based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. One of a plurality of types of light emission color patterns set over a plurality of times is determined.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 changes the light emission color of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side thereof, so that the first one of white, green, blue, and red is used. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3102a (see FIG. 135) with light emission. However, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is given three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern. The lighting is decorated at the timing. Further, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), and the light is turned off until the next time the light decoration is performed after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The time is longer. Further, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is only once, but the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light emission a plurality of times at each timing.

  In addition, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed during the decorative symbol change display, but at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed. For example, one to three out of three times of light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 may be executed at a timing during reach production after reach formation.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed above the light guide plate 3102 to make the first pattern 3102a light emitting decorated. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be caused to emit light to decorate the second pattern 3102b. However, a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is provided. Then, the first pattern 3102a is decorated with light emission. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp that the three light emission decorations of the first pattern 3102a in the light emission effect are a series of effects.

  Next, a light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 185 is an emission color pattern table in which the emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set.

  As described above, a plurality of types of light emission color patterns are set in the light emission color pattern table. In the light emission color patterns, the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 are as many times as the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated. How it changes is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 185, the light emission pattern is set in the light emission color pattern table so that it can be changed twice after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission with a predetermined light emission color.

  Further, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 set to the light emission color pattern is set so as to be decorated with light emission in any of four colors of white, green, blue, and red. Then, when determining the light emission color pattern from the light emission color pattern table, as a result of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end, the big hit expectation is set in the order of white → green → blue → red. Has been. That is, when the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a big hit, a light emission color pattern having a high emission expectation color (for example, red) as a big hit expectation is determined with high probability as the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. When the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), a light emission color pattern having a low emission expectation color (for example, white) as a final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 has a high probability. We are going to decide. As a result, when the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color having a high expectation level of jackpot, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased.

  The light emission color pattern is such that the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red. Is set so that the luminescent color is maintained or the luminescent color has a high expectation degree of jackpot. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low expectation level for jackpots, there is still a possibility of changing to a light emission color with a high expectation level for jackpots unless the timing of the light emission effect is completed three times. Therefore, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be expected with attention until the light emission effect ends.

  The light emission color pattern does not necessarily change in the order of green → blue → red after the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with white light emission. It is also set to change the next emission color (for example, change from white to red) by skipping the above emission colors. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low degree of expectation of big hit, it cannot be predicted which light emission color will change to the next light emission plate, and the light guide plate until the light emission effect ends. An attention can be paid to the emission color 3102 with expectation.

  Next, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the back effect unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorative bodies 3210 so as to surround the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, to surround the display area of the effect display area 1600, in front view. Yes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 186, four decorative bodies 3210 are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600, respectively. In addition, behind these decorative bodies 3210, a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward is mounted. Further, in the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, the light emission decoration can be performed in any of white, green, blue, and red, similarly to the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

  When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Further, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at a predetermined timing. Even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, a plurality of decorative bodies The light emission of 3210 is maintained. As described above, when a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed, a history effect in which a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 continuously emit light with the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is used as the light emission color history of the light guide plate 3102. Running.

  Specifically, at the first or second timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emitting effect, the next time after the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 and the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the timing of light emission decoration. In addition, at the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emitting effect, the decoration body 3210 is emitted with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102 and the decoration symbol variation display is finished after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. Until then, the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained. As a result, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one time is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102 is performed. By maintaining the above, even if the light emission color is missed when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the light emission color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are provided in a number corresponding to the number of luminescent colors that can illuminate the light guide plate 3102 with a light emission effect. Further, the number of lights emitted from the decorative body 3210 is different depending on the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210 are higher as the light emission color has a higher expectation level. In order from the lower side of the decorative body 3210, the number of lights emitted from the decorative body 3210 is set to increase. Specifically, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 that is decorated with light emission effects is white, which is the light emission color with the lowest expected degree of jackpot, each of the four display areas on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600 Of the decorative body 3210, one lower decorative body 3210a is set to emit white light. Further, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. Further, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. In addition, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the light emission color with the highest expectation level, the four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are set to emit light in red. As a result, even when the big hit expectation cannot be grasped from the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, the big hit expectation can be easily grasped from the number of the decorative bodies 3210 emitting light.

  The plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102 and can emit light toward the front. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emitting effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, but the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102. The light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the first picture 3102a on the light guide plate 3102 but also by the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light. As a result, the first pattern 3102a that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes more emphasized, and an effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal change before the reach is formed during the change display of the decorative design, but during the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102, Another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is not newly started. That is, another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at a timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visibility of other notice effects, and other notice effects are started. As never to be missed. That is, it is possible to cause the player to firmly grasp the light emitting effect that decorates the light guide plate 3102 and the other notice effect.

  Next, a specific effect example in the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 at the time of executing the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a specific effect example in the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 when the light emission effect is executed.

  FIG. 187 illustrates a case where a light emission color pattern in which the light emission color that decorates the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect changes from white to green to red is determined. First, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), the decorative symbol variation display is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), at the first timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second design 3102b is decorated with light emission in white on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display area 1600 is displayed. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the lower one of the decorative bodies 3210a emits light, and the emission color is white, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102. . And as shown to FIG. 187 (C), although the light emission decoration of the light-guide plate 3102 is light-extinguished for a short time (for example, less than 1 second), about the decoration body 3210a already light-emitted in white, The white light emission is maintained until the second timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (D), when it is the second time when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second design 3102b is light decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in green, and the effect display area 1600 Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the two lower decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. Emits green light. As shown in FIG. 187 (E), the light emitting decorations of the light guide plate 3102 are turned off in a short time (for example, less than one second), but the decorative bodies 3210 and 3210b that have already emitted green light. Maintains the green emission until the third timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (F), at the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second pattern 3102b is light-decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in red, and the effect display area 1600 Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area, the four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are increased so as to emit light, but the light emission color is red, which is the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Is emitting light. And as shown to FIG. 187 (G), although the light emission decoration of the light-guide plate 3102 is light-extinguished for a short time (for example, less than 1 second), about the decoration bodies 3210 to 3210d already light-emitted in red. As shown in FIG. 187 (H), the red light emission is maintained until the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished.

  In the present embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. However, at that time, the light guide plate does not emit light. A plurality of light emitters may emit light in the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 from the time when the light emitting decoration 3102 is turned off. Even in such a case, the light emission color can be grasped after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the number of light emitted from the decorative body 3210 varies depending on the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the larger the number of light emitted from the decorative body 3210, the higher the expected color of the jackpot. This indicates that the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is already decorated with light emission among the three timings when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission may be indicated. For example, at the first timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated for light emission in the light emission effect, the lower one of the four decoration objects 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display area 1600 is caused to emit light. In addition, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c may be emitted at the third timing so that the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b emit light at the second timing.

  In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a predetermined timing three times for light emission effects, but the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first timing, but at the second and third timings. Alternatively, a pattern that does not decorate the light guide 3102 or a pattern that does not decorate the light guide plate 3102 at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not possible to know how many times the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 continues in the light emission effect, and it can be noted how many times the chance that the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes is obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the decorative symbol variation display, a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed as an effect indicating the degree of big hit expectation for the variation variation display of the decoration symbol. Alternatively, light emission using the light guide plate 3102 is performed over a plurality of variations from when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 (starting condition is established) until the decorative symbol variation display by the entering ball is performed. An effect may be executed. For example, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (start condition is established), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command. Is received, based on the variation pattern specified from the prior determination command, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 when it is determined to execute the light emission effect. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may determine. Further, in such a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at a predetermined timing among a plurality of variations, and the light guide plate 3102 is turned off even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. What is necessary is just to comprise so that light emission of a several light-emitting body may be continued with the luminescent color immediately before 3102. FIG. In such a case, it can be expected to notice how the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the light emission effect ends over a plurality of variations.

  In the present embodiment, in the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 3102 a is illuminated. However, in the event that a plurality of LEDs stop emitting light due to a failure or the like, the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission, and the jackpot expectation indicated by the emission color is grasped. I can't. In this regard, after the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, so even if the light guide plate 3210 cannot be decorated with light emission, The expected degree of big hit can be grasped by the emission color of the decorative body 3210.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect for notifying that the abnormality has occurred is executed with priority over other effects. For example, when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) with respect to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that a normal game is not being performed. Then, the warning effect is executed. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of performing the light emission effect and performing light emission decoration on the light guide plate 3102, the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission of the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are given priority over the warning effect. However, after the abnormality is resolved after the timing of illuminating the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the decorative pattern change display), the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 start to emit light. Yes. As described above, even when the warning effect is performed with priority over the light emission effect, the big hit expectation can be grasped by the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit expectation is suggested by the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in the light emission effect and the history effect, but the light emission effect and the history effect are described as the setting suggestion effects described above. And the setting value may be suggested by the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when the light emission color pattern is determined from the light emission color pattern table, the set value is high in the order of white → green → blue → red as a result of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. It may be set to suggest. That is, as the high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, a light emission pattern in which the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red is executed, and as the low setting suggestion effect, the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is What is necessary is just to perform the light emission pattern used as white. As a result, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 suggests that the setting value is high, the player's response to the high setting value (setting value 6) Expectation can be raised.

[20. About image production similar to light-emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the light guide plate 3102 is not only light-decorated with a predetermined pattern, but is also guided in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern that is a visual aspect similar to the pattern that is illuminated and decorated on the light plate 3102, it is possible to perform an imitation effect that makes it appear as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, a pattern that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally one of the patterns is displayed. The reach production executed afterwards is made different.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis processing in step S601, the variation pattern is identified from the variation pattern command, but the variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is identified. In this case, a pattern that is light-decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern that is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the imitation of light-decorating the pattern on the light guide plate 3102. By executing the production, the process proceeds to the first reach production thereafter. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. In this way, the imitation effect that finally displays the pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed, and then the process proceeds to the second reach effect.

  In addition, the above-described imitation effect is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the first reach effect of the reach effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation effect during normal fluctuation, when the pattern is finally decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102, the process proceeds to the first reach effect with a high expectation of jackpot. It can be noted whether or not to decorate with light emission.

  Next, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 shows pictures displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (A), the light guide plate 3102 during execution of the imitation effect has a second pattern 3102b with the letters “CHANCE!” In the center and an effect pattern on the periphery thereof. . The light guide plate 3102 can emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side thereof, and can decorate the first pattern 3102a. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be made to emit light to decorate the second pattern 3102b, but the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102 Only the light emitting decoration of the second pattern 3102b is used.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect, as the imitation image 1600a, the character “LUCKY!” Is displayed at the center and the effect image is provided in the vicinity thereof. it's shown. Although a moving image can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a still image is displayed like the above-described imitation picture 1600a during execution of the imitation effect.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the light “CHANCE!” As the second pattern 3102b, while the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the characters “LUCKY!” As the imitation pattern 1600a. However, the imitation pattern 1600a has the same line thickness, font type, and size as the second pattern 3102b. Thus, in the imitation effect, since the form of the characters is the same, it is difficult to grasp which one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  The light guide plate 3102 illuminates and decorates the effect picture as the second picture 3102b, whereas the effect display is displayed as the counterfeit picture 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect pattern that is a part is the same as the effect pattern that is a part of the second pattern 3102b. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the effect pattern that is shared as a part of the pattern is displayed, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  In addition, the second design 3102b is lit and decorated in a single color by a plurality of LEDs on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation design 1600a is also displayed in a single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3102 b is decorated with light emission, the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3102 b is shaded depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs, but the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also imitated. The pattern 1600a is displayed so as to produce a shading. Further, when the second design 3102 b is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, a black image without displaying any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. Thus, in the imitation effect, since the visual appearance of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is difficult to grasp which one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  The light guide plate 3102 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area where the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated in 3102 is substantially the same as the area where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the areas where the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is difficult to grasp which one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. About time, all are the same time. In addition, during execution of the imitation effect, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker at the timing of displaying each of the second image 3102b and the imitation image 1600a, or around the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. A complex effect is performed in which the provided member is operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting of a lamp provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 or operation of a movable member). Even if it is the timing which displays this pattern, the common effect is performed as the compound effect. However, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are both turned on at the timing of displaying the second design 3102b and the imitation design 1600a, but the emission color is lit in a different color. May be. Thus, in the imitation production, there is no production difference between the case where the second design 3102b is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the case where the imitation design 1600a is displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600. It can be made difficult to grasp which one of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Next, a specific effect example in the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a specific effect example in the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

  In FIG. 189, a variation pattern for executing either the chance reach effect as the first reach effect or the lucky reach effect as the second reach effect is determined, and the imitation effect is performed before the reach effect is executed. The case of executing will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol variation display is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 has a second pattern 3102b with a character “CHANCE!” At the center and an effect pattern around it for a predetermined time ( For example, the lighting decoration is red. Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (C), when the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a character “LUCKY!” In the center as a counterfeit pattern 1600a. The effect pattern is displayed in blue around the predetermined time (for example, less than 1 second). The display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102.

  As described above, the second design 3102b is illuminated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation design 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this way, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed when the second image 3102b is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and when the imitation image 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to grasp which one of the two is used, it is possible to grasp which of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed from the display color.

  Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, five times). Although displayed, after repeating a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 189 (D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and a black image without any information is displayed. Yes. Thereby, as a result of the imitation effect, it is made to pay attention to which one of the second pattern 3102b lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops. it can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (E), when the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and then the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, the display of the decorative pattern is changed and displayed. Then, the game proceeds to a chance reach effect (first reach effect) as a reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3102b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 189 (F), when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the decorative display is changed. After the reach is formed, the process proceeds to the lucky reach effect (second reach effect) as the reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. In addition, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 189F is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 189E. (For example, 3 seconds).

  In the present embodiment, characters and effect designs are displayed by the second design 3102b that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation design 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is only necessary to display a pattern with a similar visual appearance so as to match the elements of, for example, a pattern of a character with a similar style.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second pattern 3102b that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, However, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, neither the second picture 3102b nor the imitation picture 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second You may set the pattern which does not advance to any of reach production. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, it is possible to pay more attention to what result is notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b of the second design 3102b that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation design 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it starts from the light emitting decoration 3102b, a pattern starting from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. In the imitation production, the second design 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, whereas the imitation design 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the production display device 1600. For color development, a pattern to be executed with a different color may be set. As described above, when the imitation effect is executed with a display or color different from the normal, the light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 is performed by setting so that the expectation of jackpot for the variable display of the decorative design is increased. Not only which of the two pictures 3102b and the imitation picture 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops but also the contents of the effect can be noted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of execution of the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, an effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed in addition to the imitation effect. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, the effect of suddenly emitting and decorating the second pattern 3102 b on the light guide plate 3102 without displaying the imitation pattern 1600 a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed. can do.

  In the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, whereas the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to such a pattern, the second design 3102b is decorated with blue light emission on the light guide plate 3102 so as to invert the color, whereas the imitation design 1600a is displayed in red on the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is set. In these patterns, red is a color that indicates that the degree of expectation of big hit is higher than that of blue. For example, when the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, the big hit is more than in the blue. Similarly, when the expectation level is high, similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the big hit expectation level is higher than that displayed in blue. In this way, in the imitation effect, since it is possible to display in blue and red for any of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, any of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 can be displayed. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102b that is lit and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By automatically displaying one of the patterns, it suggests the reach effect to be executed later, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggesting effect described above, and finally displaying any one of the patterns The setting value may be suggested. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, a counterfeit effect in which the second pattern 3102b is lit in red on the light guide plate 3102 is finally executed. In other words, an imitation effect that displays the imitation pattern 1600a in blue on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the second design 3102b is finally illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102 when the imitation effect is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting value (setting value 6) can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the light guide plate 3102 can emit light to decorate the first pattern 3102 a. On the other hand, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can emit light to decorate the second pattern 3102b. The player can change the setting by operating the pressing operation unit 303. That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be low, the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is increased. When set, the second pattern 3102b that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 has a bright display mode. And in imitation production, when the 2nd pattern 3102b luminescent decoration on the light-guide plate 3102 is a dark display mode, the imitation design 1600a displayed on the display area of the production display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3102b decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. As described above, in the imitation effect, the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to any of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a. Therefore, any of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be difficult to grasp whether or not you are using. When adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, the settings of both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs with respect to the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. Also good.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is configured by the two guide passages of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by two or more guide passages.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520, after twisting 90 degrees, twisting 90 degrees in the opposite direction, the arrangement of the entrance and the arrangement of the exit are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the entrance line and the exit line may be twisted differently. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted a plurality of times so as to be spiral.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2003 Normal winning opening (privilege grant part)
2004 Second starting point (privilege grant section)
2005 Grand prize opening 2400 Attacker unit 2500 Center actor 2505 Upstream space 2510 Upper right peripheral wall 2510
2520 Guide passage group 2520a Heavy section 2521 First guide passage (guide passage)
2522 Second guide passage (guide passage)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that performs a lottery by establishment of a predetermined condition and grants a predetermined profit to a player according to a result of the lottery,
Production control means for controlling a predetermined production related to the result of the lottery,
Sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,
The production control means includes
Volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output in the progression process of the effect by player operation;
Another setting means for setting specific sound related information different from the volume of the effect sound by a player operation different from the setting operation related to the volume of the effect sound;
Based on detection of an abnormality relating to the gaming machine, notification sound setting means for setting a notification sound corresponding to the abnormality;
With
A gaming machine characterized in that when a specific abnormality is detected among abnormalities to output the notification sound, the notification sound can be output without reflecting the setting for the specific sound related information.

Images